Sytec I Advan. Diag PDF

Technical
Publications
2242063
Revision 0
CT Sytec/Sytec i Series
Advanced Diagnostics
Copyrighte 1999 by General Electric Company
Advanced Service Documentation

Property of GE
For GE Service Personnel Only
No Rights Licensed Do Not Use or Copy
Disclosure to Third Parties Prohibited
CT SYTEC/SYTEC i SERIES
ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

REV 0
2242063
D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.
WARNING
D IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER

THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.
AVERTISSEMENT
D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE

LANGUE QUE LANGLAIS, CEST AU CLIENT QUIL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER DINTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE NA PAS T CONSULT ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, LOPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES DES
DANGERS LECTRIQUES, MCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
WARNUNG
D DIESES KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.
AVISO
D SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA

QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIN.
D NO SE DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE OTRA
NATURALEZA.

REV 0
2242063
ATENO
D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA

DISPONVEL EM INGLS.
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO.
D NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA.
D O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANA
DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELTRICOS,
MECNICOS OU OUTROS.
AVVERTENZA
D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE

SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELLAPPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALLADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE,
ALLUTILIZZATORE
ED
AL
PAZIENTE
PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

REV 0
2242063
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained
should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to
place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to
assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no
practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to
take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to
radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents,
and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GEs electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GEs field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

REV 0
2242063
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation damage in
shipment written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or signed for by a General
Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held
for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.
Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 8273449 / 8*2853449 immediately after damage is found. At
this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item
damaged and extent of damage.
Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section S of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this documentation.
Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service represenatives.
CAUTION
Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause
this equipment to malfunction.
Devices not to be used near this equipment:
Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as; cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,
radiocontrolled toy, etc.
Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment.
Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients an


REV 0
2242063
REVISION HISTORY
REV
DATE
PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE
0 . . . . . . Apr. 6, 1999 . . . Initial release.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE
REV
Title page . . . . . . . . 0
Title page rear . blank
a to d . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
A ................ 0
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
i................. 0
ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
Tab 1 (System)
i to ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
11 to 13 . . . . . . . . 0
14 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
PAGE
REV
21 to 244 . . . . . . . 0
31 to 326 . . . . . . . 0
41 to 412 . . . . . . . 0
51 to 515 . . . . . . . 0
516 . . . . . . . . . . blank
61 to 657 . . . . . . . 0
658 . . . . . . . . . . blank
71 to 77 . . . . . . . . 0
78 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
Tab 2 (OC)
i to ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
PAGE
REV
11 to 115 . . . . . . . 0
116 . . . . . . . . . . blank
21 to 216 . . . . . . . 0
31 to 314 . . . . . . . 0
41 to 48 . . . . . . . . 0
A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
A2 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
Tab 3 (Table/Gantry)
i................. 0
ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
PAGE
REV
11 to 14 . . . . . . . .
21 to 26 . . . . . . . .
31 to 324 . . . . . . .
41 to 46 . . . . . . . .
0
0
0
0
Tab 4 (DAS/Detector)
i................. 0
ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
11 to 18 . . . . . . . . 0
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
22 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
PAGE
REV
Tab 5 (XG)
i................. 0
ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
11 to 15 . . . . . . . . 0
16 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
Blank/Rear cover . .

blank
2242063

REV 0
2242063
CONTENTS
SYSTEM (TAB 1)
Introduction
Maintenance Program Support
Maintenance Program Support Display
Maintenance Program Others
Maintenance Program Class C Software
Message and Error Code Lists
Image Spatial Resolution
OPERATOR CONSOLE (TAB 2)
Power Up Sequence
OffLine Test
ETC Board Test
LED Description
Appendix A
TABLE / GANTRY (TAB3)
LED and Switch Descriptions
TGP PowerOn Test
TGP OffLine Test
Servo Amp. and Servo Motor
DAS / DETECTOR (TAB4)
Detector Channel
Image Problems
XRAY GENERATOR (TAB7)
Failure Analysis

blank
2242063
ii

REV 0
2242063
SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
11
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
SECTION 2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
2-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1
Functions of Support Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2
How to Use Support Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OFF LINE SCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STATISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAW DATA DIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEAN FILE DIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FD DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MT DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOD DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTF SURVEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
22
24
210
212
222
228
230
232
233
234
236
238
241
243
SECTION 3 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM SUPPORT DISPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
START POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAGNIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFILE (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFILE (V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HISTOGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NUMERICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SET CURSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
34
36
38
311
312
313
314
316
318
320
321
322
323
324
325
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 4 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
41
OFFLINE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST RECON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MT RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OD SWEEPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OD STUDY RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERVICE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
43
44
45
47
48
410
411
412
SECTION 5 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM CLASS C SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
5-1
5-2
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLASS C SERVICE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1
Installation and Delete of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2
Enhanced Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3
Automated CT Number Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4
Automated Post Recon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERROR MESSAGE HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1
5-3-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEAT SOAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1
5-4-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
52
52
54
56
58
510
510
512
514
514
515
SECTION 6 MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
5-3
5-4
6-1
6-2
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1
Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2
Error Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1
System Error Code and Abort Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2
INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3
Display Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-4
FPU (FPJOIN) Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-5
DMA Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-6
RAWCTL Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-7
Ethernet Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
63
63
69
628
629
636
641
650
651
652
653
SECTION 7 IMAGE SPATIAL RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
6-3
7-1
7-2
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1
Scanning the GE Performance Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2
MTF Survey Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3
Displaying the Result (MTF Curve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
71
72
72
75
76
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
1-1
INTRODUCTION
This CT system provides the Poweron Test programs to intensify system failures. For this test, refer to the Operator
Console tab of this manual. The following sections describe how to use the service maintenance programs and error
codes.
D SECTION 2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM SUPPORT
SECTION 3 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM SUPPORT DISPLAY
SECTION 4 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM OTHERS
SECTION 5 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM CLASS C SOFTWARE
These sections describe Maintenance Programs used during system service. These programs are used
to adjust and/or analyze the system.
D SECTION 6 MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS
This section contains the system messages, alarm messages and error messages sent to the status display. These messages are used to analyze system failure.
11
SYSTEM

REV 0
1-2
2242063
MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
Section 2 5 describe the functions of the service Maintenance Programs contained in the Maintenance Menu.
It includes the following programs:
9.
SUPPORT
10. SUPPORT DISPLAY

11. OFFLINE CALIBRATION
12. CT No. ADJUST
13. POST RECON
14. CUSTOM PARAMETERS
15. ME RECOVERY
16. OD SWEEPER
17. OD STUDY RECOVERY
18. TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE
19. SERVICE MODE
20. SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD
The sections which follow describe how to use these programs.
12
SYSTEM

REV 0
1-2
2242063
MAINTENANCE PROGRAM (continued)
Operational Description
Ensure that NEW PATIENT on the LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or plasma display screen blinks, and then touch the
Maintenance prompt until it inverts to black to display the Maintenance Menu.
*** MAINTENANCE MENU ***
1. CALIBRATION
Select No. =
Insert the BOOT disk into the floppy disk drive.
Enter $$ to display the following Service Maintenance menu.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
SUPPORT
SUPPORT DISPLAY
OFFLINE CALIBRATION
CT No. ADJUST
POST RECON
CUSTOM PARAMETERS
MT RECOVERY
OD SWEEPER
OD STUDY RECOVERY
TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE
SERVICE MODE
SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD
Select No. =
Type the corresponding number and press Enter to start the program.
13
SYSTEM

blank
2242063
14
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

SUPPORT
2-1
2-1-1
GENERAL
Functions of Support Programs
The SUPPORT contains the following menus:

D OFFLINE SCAN Collects Scan raw data
D TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL Online control of Table and Gantry
D STATISTICS Data statistics
D ALIGNMENT Xray alignment
D CAL WITH MEAN FILE Calculation between MEAN FILE #1 and MEAN FILE #2
D CAL WITH RAW DATA Calculation between RAW DATA and MEAN FILE
D RAW DATA DIRECTORY Shows the raw data information list of the system
D MEAN FILE DIRECTORY Shows the mean file information list of the system
D FD DUMP/LOAD Transfers raw data files
D MT DUMP/LOAD Transfers raw data files
D MOD DUMP/LOAD Transfers raw data files
D WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS
D MTF SURVEY Calculates the image spatial resolution
21
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-1-2
1.
2242063
How to Use Support Programs
Select 1.(SUPPORT) from the Maintenance menu to display the following Support Menu:
*** SUPPORT MENU ***
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
OFF LINE SCAN

TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL
STATISTICS
ALIGNMENT
CAL WITH MEAN FILE
CAL WITH RAW DATA
RAW DATA DIRECTORY
MEAN FILE DIRECTORY
FD DUMP/LOAD
MT DUMP/LOAD
MOD DUMP/LOAD
WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS
MTF SURVEY
Select No. =
2.
Select an item from the menu. When you exit an item, this menu automatically reappears for the next selection.
Note
D When the software requires an entry, it either displays the most recently set parameter for that selection,
or a default parameter. Press [ENTR] to accept the displayed parameter.
D Press [END] key to terminate the current process and return (send) software control to a level one level
prior to (higher than) the terminated process.
When using a support program, press the [Cancel] key to directly return to the Support menu.
The following diagram lists software levels
NEW PATIENT BLINKING
Softkey
Prompt
END or Cancel
MAINTENANCE menu
Select:1
END or Cancel
SUPPORT menu
Select:1
END
KIND OF SCAN menu
Select:1
END
AXIAL: SCAN OR EDIT
Cancel
Cancel
D If you make an improper entry, the software displays the following message and waits for a valid input.
** INVALID ENTRY
22
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-1-2
2242063
How to Use Support Programs (continued)

Note
D If a system error occurs, the software displays the following message and sends control one level higher,
to the prior level.
** SYSTEM ERROR XXXXXXXX
(Error Code)
D A raw data file created by a Support program has the following ID No.:
00 : 00000. XX. 01 ; 01
Station
Study
Series
Image
Acquisition
Here XX: 1 99. A raw data file can be selected by entering a Series number only, since the rest is predetermined as above.
D The screen displays up to 30 lines of text and/or data at a time.
23
SYSTEM
REV 0
2-2
2242063
OFF LINE SCAN
This menu is used to perform offline scans (axial, stationary, or scout) and collect raw data files.
A series No. must be specified every time an offline scan is performed. If a new series No. is not specified every
time, the software will overwrite the existing file. It will not automatically update the series No., even if scan parameters
are modified.
Enter 1 (OFF LINE SCAN) in the Support menu to display the following menu:
*** KIND OF SCAN ***
1. AXIAL
2. STATIONARY
3. SCOUT
Select No.=
Axial Scan
1.
Enter 1 (AXIAL) in the KIND OF SCAN menu to display the following scan parameter list:
Select No.= 1
*** AXIAL SCAN ***
SCAN TIME
CW/CCW
THICKNESS
SCAN FOV
RECON FOV
XG, ROTOR
kV
mA
2.7 sec (3.6sec in CT Sytec 2000i, S)

CW
10.0 mm
25 cm
25.0 cm
XG ON
120 kV
40 mA
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=
This list contains either default scan parameters or previously selected parameters.
24
SYSTEM
REV 0
2-2
2242063
OFF LINE SCAN (continued)
Axial Scan (continued)

2.
To modify the parameter, select 2 (EDIT).

Select No.= 2
SCAN TIME
( 2 )=
CW/CCW
( 1 )=
THICKNESS
( 1 )=
SCAN FOV
( 1 )=
RECON FOV
( 25.0 )=
XG, ROTOR
( 1 )=
mA
( 1 )
<1:1.8sec, 2:2.7sec, 3:4.5sec>

<1:CW, 2:CCW>
<1:10.0mm, 2:5.0mm, 3:3.0mm, 4:2.0mm, 5:1.0mm>
<1:25cm, 2:35cm, 3:42cm>
<3.0, 3.1, 3.2, ......41.9, 42.0 [cm]>
<1:XG ON, 2:ROTOR ON, 3:BOTH OFF>
<l:40mA, 2:60mA, 3:80mA, 4:100mA, 5:130mA, 6:160mA>
Note
The mA parameter only appears when XG ON is selected.
3.
Select 1 (SCAN) to perform the scan.

1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.= 1
4.
Specify a Raw Data File ID No. (Series No.:1 99; Study No. is fixed at 00000.).
(Remember to change the series No. when acquiring multiple scans) Then, proceed to scan operation.
*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***
* Enter SERIES No. = 1
PRESS < SET > AND < START > TO SCAN
** SCAN END
Note
The CRT either displays previously set scan parameters or default parameters.
Once you quit the Support Program, the scan parameters revert to the default values.
25
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-2
2242063
Stationary Scan
1.
Enter 2 (STATIONARY) in the KIND OF SCAN menu to display the following scan parameter list:
Select No.= 2
*** STATIONARY SCAN ***
AZIMUTH
SCAN TIME
CW/CCW
THICKNESS
SCAN FOV
RECON FOV
XG, ROTOR
kV
mA
Present Degree
2.7 sec
CW
10.0 mm
25 cm
25.0 cm
XG ON
120 kV
40 mA
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=
2.

The Gantry does not rotate during a stationary scan.
Specify a Gantry azimuth (Xray tube) position at any multiples of 5 degrees between 0 and 355 degrees.
The 0 degrees position is equivalent to the Xray tube at 12 oclock; the 90 degrees position is equivalent to the
tube at the 3 oclock position (viewed from Table).
The rest parameters are identical to the axial scan.
Select No.= 2
AZIMUTH
( 1 )
SCAN TIME
( 2 )=
CW/CCW
( 1 )=
THICKNESS
( 1 )=
SCAN FOV
( 1 )=
RECON FOV
( 25.0 )=
XG, ROTOR
( 1 )=
mA
( 1 )
<0, 5, 10, .....350, 355 [deg]
1:Present deg>
<1:1.8sec, 2:2.7sec, 3:4.5sec>

<1:CW, 2:CCW>
<1:10.0mm, 2:5.0mm, 3:3.0mm, 4:2.0mm, 5:1.0mm>
<1:25cm, 2:35cm, 3:42cm>
<3.0, 3.1, 3.2, ......41.9, 42.0 [cm]>
<l:40mA, 2:60mA, 3:80mA, 4:100mA, 5:130mA, 6:160mA>
Note
26
SYSTEM
REV 0
2-2
2242063
Stationary Scan (continued)

3.

1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.= 1
4.
* Enter SERIES No. = 1
PRESS < SET > AND < START > TO SCAN
** SCAN END
Note
27
SYSTEM
REV 0
2-2
2242063
Scout Scan
1.
Enter 3 (SCOUT) in the KIND OF SCAN menu to display the following scan parameter list:
Select No.= 3
*** SCOUT SCAN ***
AZIMUTH
TABLE
THICKNESS
XG, ROTOR
kV
mA
0 deg
250 mm
1.0 mm
XG ON
120 kV
40 mA
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=
2.

The scout scan list contains parameters common to the axial scan, and, in addition, Azimuth and Table parameters:
Specify a Gantry azimuth (Xray tube) position at any multiples of 5 degrees between 0 degrees and 355
degrees.
Enter a Table travel parameter (scanned length) (between 50mm and 500mm: 1mm step).
Select No.= 2
AZIMUTH
( 1 )
TABLE
( 250 )
XG, ROTOR
( 1 )=
mA
( 1 )
<0, 5, 10, .....350, 355 [deg]
1:Present deg>
<50, 51, 52, .....499, 500 [mm]>

<l:40mA, 2:60mA, 3:80mA, 4:100mA, 5:130mA, 6:160mA>
Note
3.

1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.= 1
28
SYSTEM
REV 0
2-2
2242063
Scout Scan (continued)

4.
* Enter SERIES No.= 1
5.
Upon entering the Series No., the Gantry moves to the designated azimuth position.
Push the blinking SET button, and the Table will move for 20mm in the IN direction. Then push the blinking
START button and hold it until the scan is over; the Table will move in the OUT direction for the designated
travel plus +20mm.
Note
29
SYSTEM
REV 0
2-3
2242063
TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL
Online control of the Table and Gantry can be checked with this program by positioning the Table or Gantry to arbitrary positions. The Table is moved to an entered absolute position. The Xray tube is moved to an entered azimuth
position (multiples of five degrees between 0 and .355 degrees).
Enter 2 (TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL) in the Support menu to display the following menu:
*** TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL ***
1. TABLE CONTROL
2. GANTRY CONTROL
Select No.=
Table Control
1.
Enter 1 (TABLE CONTROL) in TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL menu to display the following TABLE CONTROL
parameters:
Select No.= 1
*** TABLE CONTROL ***
Enter ABSOLUTE POSITION
< 765.0mm (IN) <> (OUT) 765.0mm > = 100
KEEP PRESSING <TABLE SET>
Press <ENTER> to Move
*** TABLE CONTROL ***
Enter ABSOLUTE POSITION
< 765.0mm (IN) <> (OUT) 765.0mm > =
The above is an example where the Table is moved to the 100mm position. Enter values falling within the IN and
OUT limit values (765.0mm and +765.0mm, in this example). The travel range (OUTIN) is 1530mm.
When the required travel is 20mm or less, the following message does not appear but Table starts moving upon
pressing [ENTER].
KEEP PRESSING <TABLE SET>
Press <ENTER> to Move
210
SYSTEM
REV 0
2-3
2242063
TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL (continued)
Gantry Control
Note
With this program, the Gantry rotates at the speed for a 1.8sec. When you select 2 or 3, you will have
to specify scan time.
1.
Enter 2 (GANTRY CONTROL) in the TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL menu to display the following GANTRY
CONTROL parameter:
Select No.= 2
*** GANTRY CONTROL ***
1. GANTRY POSITION
2. CW REST POSITION
3. CCW REST POSITION
Select No.=
2.
To set the azimuth position, select 1 (GANTRY POSITION).

Select No.= 1
Enter GANTRY POSITION <0, 5, 10, ..., 355 DEG> =
3.
To rotate the Gantry to CW/CCW rest position, select 2/3 (CW/CCW REST POSITION).
Select No.= 2(or 3)
Enter SCAN TIME
<1:1.8sec, 2:2.7sec, 3:4.5sec> =
211
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-4
2242063
STATISTICS
This program displays DAS data, including offset data, in decimal or hexadecimal numbers, with or without corrections
(offset file correction and/or reference channel correction), or performs arithmetic operations (average, Log, etc.) on
the raw data. You can store processed or unprocessed DAS data to MEAN file or RAW file.
Enter 3 (STATISTICS) in the Support menu to display the following menu:
*** STATISTICS ***
Enter ID No.=
Enter ID No. (Series #) of the Raw data file to process.
Note
You can shorten the ID No. (STUDY #. SER #. ACQ #).
Example:
0.4.1 4
0.6.1 6
Enter ID No.= 0.4.1
STUDY SER AQ
HF TYPE STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV
MA FCS
0000
60
04
01
CW
2.7 000
+0 10.0 25 120
DATA & TIME

1992/07/01 12:34:56
*** RAW DATA FORMAT ***

1.OFFSET AVERAGE
2.DAS DATA
3.FAN
Select No.=
212
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-4
2242063
STATISTICS (continued)
Offset Average
During each scan, the software collects 64 views of data (offset data) to obtain offset average data for each channel,
just before xray exposure starts. This program examines the offset average data, and the maximum or minimum
offset data and standard deviation data of each channel. You can also store this data to MEAN FILE.
1.
Select 1 (OFFSET AVERAGE). The following screen appears.

*** OFFSET AVERAGE ***
MAX
MAX
MIN
AVE
+346.0000
+221.0000
+295.4994
XXX ch XX view
XXX ch XX view
MIN
MAX
MIN
AVE
+338.5000
+208.0000
+266.5227
XXX ch XX view
XXX ch XX view
MEAN MAX
MIN
AVE
+340.5078
+218.0781
+281.0197
XXX ch
XXX ch
S.D. MAX
MIN
AVE
+34.0549
+0.4558
+9.8788
XXX ch
XXX ch
XXX ch
*** KIND OF DATA ***

1.MAX
2.MIN
3.AVE
4.S.D.
Select No.=
OFFSET AVERAGE displays the following data, and channel and view No. that produced these data:
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MAX data of each channel.
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MIN data of each channel.
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MEAN data of each channel.
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of S.D. (Standard deviation) data of each channel.
Ch
12
Ch
847
View1
Offset View
View64
MAX
MIN
MEAN
S.D.
jj
jj
jj
jj
213
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-4
2242063
Offset Average (continued)

2.
Select one of KIND OF DATA item from the menu. Example: If you select 1 (MAX), the following screen appears.
Select No.= 1
** DISPLAY/FILING **
1.DISPLAY
2.STORE FILE
Select No.=
a. DISPLAY:
This selection numerically displays the offset data foe each channel on the screen.
Select 1 (DISPLAY) from the DISPLAY/FILING menu.
Select No.= 1
Select CHANNEL No.(1) =
Press [RTN] to see data from the first 104 channels (Ch.1 to Ch.104). To see subsequent channel data, enter
a channel number, and that channels data is displayed in the first line of the table followed by data from the
following channels. The number in parentheses is the default number.
CHANNEL
MAX DATA
0001
+313.5000
+236.5000
0005
+277.5000
+276.5000
0009
+320.5000
+320.0000
0013
+301.0000
+299.5000
.
.
.
0085
+288.5000
+291.5000
0089
+309.0000
+286.5000
0093
+284.5000
+284.0000
0097
+296.5000
+296.5000
+319.0000
+323.0000
+326.5000
+249.0000
+278.0000
+322.5000
+326.5000
+248.5000
+297.5000
+277.0000
+284.0000
+300.5000
+297.5000
+274.5000
+284.0000
+300.0000
Select CHANNEL No.(105) =

Note
The displayed channel Nos. correspond to as described below.
Ch.1 635 : active channels
Ch.636 679 : reference channels
214
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-4
2242063
Offset Average (continued)

b. STORE:
This selection stores the offset data (MAX, MIN, MEAN, or S.D. data) to a MEAN file. The mean file takes the
form shown below:
1 635
R1 R22
R23 R44
Where,
1 635: offset data of active channels
R1 R44: offset data of reference channels
You can store up to 16 MEAN files. Enter a file No.(1 16) and a comment (39 characters maximum).
Select 2 (STORE FILE) from the DISPLAY/FILING menu.
Select No.= 2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter MEAN FILE No.<116> = 1
Enter COMMENT = MAX OF OFFSET
** STORE
** STORE END
215
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-4
2242063
DAS Data
This program displays DAS data transferred from the DAS to the IPU (via DAS Buffer Unit in DISP), with no data
correction (offset file correction or reference channel correction) applied to the data. Special floating point hexadecimal numbers are displayed for each channel, or for each view, with the channel and view numbers indicating the transfer sequence. It also displays Offset data. Refer to the Note followed.
1.
Select 2 (DAS DATA) from the RAW DATA FORMAT menu.
2.
Enter 1 (VIEW) to display the channel data on a selected view, or 2 (CHANNEL) to display the view data on a
selected channel.
Select No.= 2
*** DAS DATA ***
1.VIEW
2.CHANNEL
Select No.= 1
Enter VIEW No.= 100
** START
Enter CHANNEL No.(1) =
3.
Press [RTN] to display blocks of data, as shown below. Each block consists of 31 data. Each view contains 22
blocks. To see subsequent channel data, enter a channel number, and that channels data is displayed in the
first line of the table, followed by data from the following channels. The number in parentheses is the default number.
CHANNEL
VIEW No.=
0001
00E0
04C1
0009
140B
1483
0017
1DE3
23EE
.
.
.
0180
2D85
2DE6
0187
29C7
290B
0195
1D3A
1AB3
0100
086A
1550
24AC
08FF
1620
25BE
09E8
176F
2615
0A94
188B
273F
0C6B
1A45
2835
138F
1B6E
28FD
2E2F
27E2
1989
2DC2
26FE
17DE
2C1E
2603
1703
2CD7
255B
1632
2BD3
245B
1524
23C4
1468
Enter CHANNEL No.(203) =

4.
Press [END] to return to Enter VIEW No.= to select and see channel data from different view.
ENTER CHANNEL No.(203) = END
End of display
Enter VIEW No.=
216
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-4
2242063
DAS Data (continued)

Note
D Data format (Special floatingpoint)
a1
a0
b13 b12
b11 b10 b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
DAS Count = 2N bi x 2i (bi: 0 or 1)

a1
0
0
1
1
Example (540B)16
a0
0
1
0
1
N
1
1
3
5
= (01 01 0100 0000 1011)2
= 21 x (1 x 163 +4 x 162 +0 x 16 + 11)
= (10262)10
D The displayed channel and view numbers only indicate the transfer sequence of DAS data; they are not
the real channel or view numbers.
682 pieces of data are transferred during one view period.
(682 = 31 channels (1 block) x 22 (triggers))
D The offset view numbers and active view numbers are as follows:
View 1 65: offset views (one dummy view + 64 views)
View 66 714: active views (one dummy view + 648 views)
217
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-4
2242063
FAN
This selection displays raw data in decimal numbers with or without applying corrections (offset file correction and/or
reference channel correction) and/or arithmetic operation (natural logarithm) to DAS data.
The channel numbers displayed correspond to the DAS or Detector channel numbers as described below:
Ch.1 635
: active channels
Ch.636 679
: reference channels
You can store the processed or unprocessed raw data to a MEAN file or RAW file.
1.
Select 3 (FAN) from the RAW DATA FORMAT menu and choose whether or not to apply corrections or conversion to the data.
Select No.= 3
*** OPERATION SELECT ***
OFFSET FILE CORRECTION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=
REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION <0:6ch, 1:22block, 2:NO> (2)=
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=
Note
REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION <0:6ch, 1:22block, 2:No>
6ch: Performs the reference channel correction using the mean of data of Ch.1 3, Ch.633 635.
22 block: Performs the reference channel correction using the normal reference channel data.
** START
MAX
MAX
MIN
AVE
+30376.000000
+1001.500000
+10700.650000
XXX ch XX view
XXX.ch XX view
MIN
MAX
MIN
AVE
+28112.000000
+912.499900
+9979.113000
XXX ch XX view
XXX ch XX view
MEAN
MAX
MIN
AVE
+29012.460000
+962.605900
+10256.390000
XXX ch
XXX ch
S.D.
MAX
MIN
AVE
+981.421200
+6.808363
+153.021000
XXX ch
XXX ch
*** KIND OF DATA ***

1. ORIGINAL
2. MAX
3. MIN
4. MEAN
5. S.D.
Select No.=
218
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-4
2242063
FAN (continued)
The system displays the following data after calculations:
Ch
12
Ch
679
View65
Active View
View712
MAX
MIN
MEAN
S.D.
jj
jj
jj
jj
219
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-4
2242063
FAN (continued)
2.
Select Kind of Data.

ORIGINAL displays the channel data for a certain view, or displays the view data for a certain channel.
MAX, MIN, MEAN and S.D. display the maximum, minimum, mean, and S.D. data of each channel.
The following describes the procedures for each data.
1.ORIGINAL:
a. DISPLAY:
*** DISPLAY/FILING ***
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= 1
*** DISPLAY ***
1. VIEW
2. CHANNEL
Select No.= 1
Enter VIEW No.= 10
Enter CHANNEL No.(1)=
CHANNEL
VIEW No.=
0001
+311.000000
0005
+276.000000
0009
+318.000000
.
.
.
0093
+308.500000
0097
+272.000000
0101
+245.000000
010
+234.000000
+275.000000
+319.000000
+318.000000
+273.000000
+269.000000
+274.500000
+322.000000
+325.000000
+285.500000
+285.500000
+295.500000
+276.500000
+274.500000
+295.500000
+273.000000
+273.000000
+299.000000
Enter CHANNEL No.(105)=

b. STORE
Select No.= 2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter RAW FILE No.<13> 3
** START
** STORE END
Ch
1
View1
View64
View65
Ch
Ch
635 R44
Offset Data
Active Data
View712
1 635: active channels

R1 R44 (636 679): reference channels
220
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-4
2242063
FAN (continued)
2.MAX:
Note
MIN, MEAN, S.D. menus are similar to this MAX menu.
a. DISPLAY
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= 1
Select Channel No.(1) = CR
CHANNEL
MAX DATA
0001
+1712.000000
0005
+1630.500000
.
.
.
0096
+1930.000000
0097
+2004.000000
0101
+2084.000000
+1606.500000
+1595.500000
+1646.000000
+1716.000000
+1643.500000
+1722.000000
+1870.000000
+1972.000000
+2058.000000
+2046.000000
+2038.000000
+2086.000000
+1916.000000
+2018.000000
+2116.000000
Select CHANNEL No.(105)=

b. STORE:
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= 2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter COMMENT = MAX DATA OF CHANNEL
** START
** STORE END
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=
221
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-5
2242063
ALIGNMENT
This menu is used to center the phantoms and check or adjust Xray alignment. Three programs are available for
Xray check/adjustment procedures: GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE, ISO CENTER CHANNEL, and FILTER CENTER
CHANNEL. The ISO CENTER CHANNEL program aligns the Xray tube to the Detector. The FILTER CENTER
CHANNEL program checks/adjusts filter alignment to the Detector.
You can display the calculated center channels at each view (1 648) on the screen or store them to MEAN FILE
(No.1 16).
Enter 4 (ALIGNMENT) in the Support menu to display the following menu:
*** ALIGNMENT ***
1. GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE
2. ISO CENTER CHANNEL
3. FILTER CENTER CHANNEL
4. PHANTOM CENTERING
Select No.=
222
SYSTEM
REV 0
2-5
2242063
ALIGNMENT (continued)
Gravity SAG Amplitude

For this procedure, the gravity pin is attached to the Xray tube collimator during axial scans. This program measures
fluctuations of the projection of the pin onto the Detector to check for abnormalities of the rotating mechanism (bend,
vibrations, etc.).
Perform two offline scans (see Section 2-2,OffLine Scan), following the instructions described below:
1.
Air File:
Remove the Bowtie filter from the collimator, and scan air. Record the series No.
(Scan Parameters:1.8sec / CW / 10mm / 120kV / 40mA (2.7sec:CT Sytec, 3000i / 3.6sec:CT Sytec 2000i, S))
2.
POC File (Pin on Collimator):

Remove the Bowtie filter (same as for Air File). Attach the SAG alignment pin to the collimator. Scan the pin,
and record the series No.
3.
Select 1 (GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE) from the Alignment menu.
4.
Enter the ID numbers of the Air and POC Files. (ID No. = Series No.)
*** GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE ***
RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No.= 1
RAW DATA FILE (POC)
Enter ID No.= 2
Note
If the raw data files are not stored, the following message is displayed;
** FILE NOTING
The computer starts calculations, and then displays the following results:
** START
CENTER CH. = aaa.aaa
AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx
5.
aaa.aaa
: 1/2 x (Maximum center channel No. in all views + Minimum center channel No. in all views)
xxx.xxx
: Average of center channel numbers at each view
You can display the center channels at each view or store them in the DISPLAY/FILING menu.
223
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-5
2242063
ISO Center Channel

The ISO CENTER CHANNEL program determines the center channel of the Detector which receives the projection
of a pin placed in the reconstruction area. The system determines the center channel at each view, then calculates
the average center channel and displays it along with instructions to shift the Xray tube into proper alignment. Shift
the Xray tube tangentially to the rotation circle. The correct ISO center channel is 317.75 Ch.
The adjustment tolerance is 0.02 Ch. Perform four offline scans (see Section 2-2, OffLine Scan), following the
instructions described below:
1.
Air File:
2.
Pin File:
Remove the Bowtie filter (same as for Air File). Place a steel pin (6mm in diameter) about 5cm off the center
of reconstruction area. Scan the pin, and record the series No.
3.
Select 2 (ISO CENTER CHANNEL) from Alignment menu.
4.
Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Pin Files. (ID No. = Series No.)
*** ISO CENTER CHANNEL ***
RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No.= 3
RAW DATA FILE (PIN)
Enter ID No.= 4
Note
If the raw data files are not stored, the following message is displayed;
** FILE NOTING
** START
ISO AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx (317.75 0.02)
MOVE TUBE C.CCC MM RIGHT
XXX.XXX: Average of center channels for each view.
5.
With the tube at the Gantry 12 oclock position, move the tube right or left, if viewed from the Table for C.CCCmm,
according to the instructions. Repeat the procedure until the Iso center channel equals 317.75 0.02Ch.
6.
224
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-5
2242063
Filter Center Channel

The FILTER CENTER CHANNEL program measures the center channel receiving the projection of the filter onto the
Detector. The software measures the center channel for each view, then calculates and displays the average center
channel along with instructions to shift the filter into proper alignment. The correct filter center channel equals the iso
center channel: 317.75Ch. The adjustment tolerance is 0.3Ch. Shift the filter tangentially to the rotation circle.
Perform two offline scans (see Section 2-2, OffLine Scan), following the instructions below:
1.
Air File:
2.
Filter File:
Install the Bowtie filter, and scan air. Record the series No.
3.
Select 3 (FILTER CENTER CHANNEL) from the Alignment menu.
4.
Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Filter Files. (ID No. = Series No.)
*** FILTER CENTER CHANNEL ***
RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No.= 3
RAW DATA FILE (FILTER)
Enter ID No.= 5
** START
FILTER AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx (317.75 0.30)
MOVE FILTER D.DDD MM RIGHT
XXX.XXX: Average of center channels for each view.
5.
With the tube at the Gantry 12 oclock position, move the filter right or left, if viewed from the Table for D.DDDmm,
according to the instructions. Repeat the procedure until the filter center channel equals 317.75 0.3Ch.
6.
225
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-5
2242063
Phantom Centering
The PHANTOM CENTERING program centers the phantoms on the scan plane. After calculating actual phantom
position, software instructs you to shift the phantom to center it. Shift the phantom right or left and up or down (viewed
from the Table).
Perform two offline scans (see Section 2-2, OffLine Scan), following the instructions below:
1.
Air File:
Bowtie filter installed. Scan air, and record the series No.
2.
Phantom File:
Bowtie filter installed. Scan phantom, and record the series No.
3.
Select 4 (PHANTOM CENTERING) from the Alignment menu.
4.
Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Phantom Files. (ID No. = Series No.)
*** PHANTOM CENTERING ***
RAW DATA FILE (AIR [CW])
Enter ID No.= 6
RAW DATA FILE (PHANTOM [CW])
Enter ID No.= 7
** START
MOVE DOWN
MOVE RIGHT
e.ee MM
f.ff MM
( 0.15)
( 0.15)
*** ALIGNMENT ***

1. GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE
2. ISO CENTER CHANNEL
3. FILTER CENTER CHANNEL
4. PHANTOM CENTERING
Select No.=
5.
Move the phantom up or down (according to the instruction) for e.ee mm and left or right (viewed from the Table)
for f.ff mm. Repeat the procedure until instructed to move the phantom 0.0 ( 0.15mm).
226
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-5
2242063
Display/Filing
The DISPLAY/FILING menu displays or stores the center channels at each view calculated in the GRAVITY SAG
AMPLITUDE, ISO CENTER CHANNEL, or FILTER CENTER CHANNEL programs to MEAN FILE (No.1 16).
The following menu appears after the calculations:
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=
An example for DISPLAY and STORE FILE:
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= 1
Select VIEW No. (1)=
Enter a view No.
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= 2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter MEAN FILE No. <116>= 1
Enter COMMENT = CENTER CH OF ISO
** STORE END
227
SYSTEM
REV 0
2-6
2242063
CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE
This program performs algebraic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division) between Mean files, or applies some filters to a Mean file. Create Mean files with OFFSET AVERAGE, FAN (except for ORIGINAL), and ALIGNMENT (except for PHANTOM CENTERING) programs. The ALIGNMENT Mean file consists of each views channel
number, so calculations may not be performed between the ALIGNMENT file and the ordinary Mean file. The program
also displays Mean file data, the calculation results, and stores the calculation results to Mean file.
Enter 5 (CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE) in the Support menu. The following menu appears:
** CALUCLATION WITH MEAN FILE **
1. FILE 1 + FILE 2
2. FILE 1 FILE 2
3. FILE 1 * FILE 2
4. FILE 1 / FILE 2
5. DIFFERENTIAL FILTER
6. LOW PASS FILTER
7. HIGH PASS FILTER
8. DISPLAY
Select No.=
Example: Choose 1 (FILE1 + FILE2) and software performs the following calculation:
AC = EC +FC, where
EC : Data of Ch. C in Mean File 1
FC : Data of Ch. C in Mean File 2
AC : Data of Ch. C in the calculated file
C : Ch. No.
Ch.1 635 active channels
Ch.636 679 reference channels
A680 A1024 : do not care
228
SYSTEM
REV 0
2-6
2242063
CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE (continued)
Menu No. 1, 2, 3, 4
1.
Enter Mean File No.

*** MEAN FILE SELECTION
SELECT MEAN FILE No.<116> AS FILE 1
Enter MEAN FILE No.= 1
SELECT MEAN FILE No. <116> AS FILE 2
Enter MEAN FILE No.= 2
The computer starts the calculation, and then displays the DISPLAY/FILING menu.
Menu No. 5, 6, 7
1.
Enter Mean File No.

***MEAN FILE SELECTION ***
Enter MEAN FILE No.<116>_
The computer starts the calculation, and then displays the DISPLAY/FILING menu.
Note
D When you select 5 (DIFFERENTIAL FILTER), the system performs the following calculation:
DC = EC+1 EC, where
EC : Data of Ch. C in the selected Mean file
DC : Data of Ch. C in the calculated file
C : Ch. No.
D Menu No. 6, 7: These are used in the YMS Manufacturing only.
Display/Filing
DISPLAY : Displays most recent calculations, or any mean file data.
FILING : Stores the calculations to a mean file.
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=
229
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-7
2242063
CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA
This program performs algebraic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division) between a mean file and
a raw data file. Up to three raw data files (numbered 1, 2, 3) can be stored in the Support program.
Select 6 (CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA) from the Support menu. The following menu appears:
*** CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA ***
1. RAW
2. RAW
3. FILE
4. RAW
5. RAW
6. FILE
+
+
*
/
/
FILE
FILE
RAW
FILE
FILE
RAW
For example, RAW + FILE is selected, calculations illustrated below are performed.
Illustration 23
File Formats
RAW DATA FILE

Ch
1
CALCULATED FILE
Ch
679
View 1
Ch
1
Offset Data
View 64
View 65
Ch
679
View 1
DV,C
V : 1 712
C : 1 679
EV,C
V : 1 648
C : 1 679
View 712
View 648
Mean File
MC
EV, C = DV + 64, C + MC, where

V : View number 1 648
C : Channel number 1 679
C:1679
230
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-7
1.
2242063
CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA (continued)

Select a kind of operation and enter Mean File No. and Raw Data File No.
Select No.= 1
Enter RAW DATA FILE No.<13> _
Enter MEAN FILE No.<116> _
The following data are shown after calculation:
Ch
12
Ch
679
View65
Active View
View712
MAX
MIN
MEAN
S.D.
jj
jj
jj
jj
Then, KIND OF DATA menu appears:

** KIND OF DATA **
1. ORIGINAL
2. MAX
3. MIN
4. MEAN
5. S.D.
Select No.=
2.
For the subsequent procedures, refer to KIND OF DATA in Section 2-4, FAN. This menu displays the calculated
file or saves it to a RAW FILE or MEAN FILE.
231
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-8
2242063
RAW DATA DIRECTORY
This menu displays a raw data file directory. Each raw data file is displayed with scan parameter information, STUDY
No., SERIES No., ACQUISITION No. and DATE and TIME. Raw data files are listed in chronological order, with the
most recently scanned file at the top of the list.
Select 7 (RAW DATA DIRECTORY) from the Support menu.
STUDY
SER
ACQ
HF
TYPE
STM
AZM
TBL
THK
FOV
KV
MA
00000
03
01
CW
2.7
000
00
10
25
120
040
1992/07/01
Scan Time
Vale of
1.8
Table
2.7
Movement
4.5
(mm)
1
Study No. Acquisition Scan Type
10
5
No.
AP
5
:
LT
3
355
AZ
1
CW
CCW
25
35
42
160
130
100
80
60
40
Date and Time of Scanning

yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss
Series No. Head/Feet

First
120
DATE
&
TIME
15:22:05
Press [RTN] to continue.

Or press [END] to end.
232
SYSTEM

REV 0
2-9
2242063
MEAN FILE DIRECTORY
Select 8 (MEAN FILE DIRECTORY) to display the directory of mean files and warmup work files.
MEAN FILE
No COMMENT
DATE
&
1
1994/09/10
2
1994/09/10
3
1994/09/05
4 MAX DATA OF CHANNEL
1994/09/09
5 WITHOUT FILTER. WITH OFFSET CORR. 1994/09/29
6 001 CAL
1994/09/28
7 WARM UP SD
1994/19/14
8
1994/09/06
WARM UP WORK FILE
No DATE & TIME
1 1994/10/09
10:10:10
2 1994/10/09
10:30:33
TIME
16:55:44
15:02:54
18:51:25
20:55:12
21:23:42
11:14:12
12:58:36
13:37:10
Press <END> to END

You can store up to 16 mean files in the SUPPORT program, numbered 1 to 16.
233
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063
2-10 FD DUMP/LOAD
This menu dumps raw data files from the hard DISK to FD, or loads a raw data file from FD to the hard disk. Inset
a floppy disk in the FD unit (it takes two floppy disks to store one raw data file).
Select 9 (FD DUMP/LOAD) from the Support menu. Enter the ID No. The following menu appears:
** RAW
1. DUMP
2. LOAD
Select
DATA DUMP/LOAD (FD) ***

(DISK > FD)
(FD > DISK)
No.= _
Dump (from Disk to FD)

Note
Verify that the floppy disk to be used is writeenabled before starting to dump.
The example below shows a raw data file of ID No. 20.1.4 (Study#:20, Ser#:1, Acq#:4) is dumped to two floppy disks.
Select No.= 1
PRESS <END> TO END
Enter ID No.= 20.1.4
** DUMP START
1.
After you enter the ID No., software initialized the floppy disk with VOLUME name FRAW and USER No. 0, and
then starts the dump procedure with File name FRAW:0...RAW DATA n VR(n=0, 1, 2......).
Note
If the FD is protected for write, the following message is displayed:
** FD NOT READY
After Inserting FD, Press <ENTR>
After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR>
** DUMP START
(Insert the second floppy disk)
**DUMP COMPLETE
2.
When the floppy disk becomes full, the CRT displays, After Inserting Another FD, press <ENTR>.
Continue to Dump? <0:Yes, 1:No> _
3.
If you want to continue the dump procedure, enter 0(Yes).

After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR> _
4.
Replace the current floppy disk with another one, or the current floppy disk will be overwritten.
234
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063
2-10 FD DUMP/LOAD (continued)

Load (from FD to Disk)
The example below shows that a raw data file occupying two floppy disks is loaded to Series No. 44
(Study#:0, Ser#:44, Acq#:1, Image#:1).
1.
Insert the raw data floppy disk into the FD unit.
2.
Enter Series No. (Station#:0, Study#:0, Acq#:1, Image#:1) (The raw data file is contained on two floppy disks.)
*** RAW DATA LOAD FROM FD ***
PRESS <END> TO END
Enter SERIES No.= 44
** LOAD START
After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR>
** LOAD START
** LOAD COMPLETE
Continue to Load ? <0:Yes, 1:No> _
Note
D If the current floppy disk does not have VOLUME name RRAW, the following message appears:
** ILLEGAL FD VOLUME ID = XXXX
D If the File name is the floppy disk is not right, the message below appears:
** ILLEGAL FILE NAME
235
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063
2-11 MT DUMP/LOAD
This menu dumps raw data files from DISK to MT, or loads raw data files from MT to DISK.
Select 10 (MT DUMP/LOAD) from the Support menu. The following menu appears:
** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MT) **
1. DUMP ( DISK MT )
2. LOAD ( MT DISK )
Select No.= _
Dump (from Disk to MT)

Note
Verify that the MT unit is ON LINE (READY) and TAPE is not protected.
1.
Select 1 (DUMP). The following menu appears:

*** DUMP (FROM DISK TO MT) ***
1. APPEND
2. REWRITE
2.
Select 1.APPEND or 2.REWRITE.

APPEND : Writes data after the existing data on Mag tape (does not write over existing data)
REWRITE : Writes data from the beginning of Mag tape (writes over existing data on Mag tape)
3.
The example below shows:

A raw data file of ID No.3 (Ser#:3) on DISK is dumped to FILE No.0 on MT.
(MT file numbers can not be arbitrarily assigned; they should be 0, 1, 2,... from the beginning of Mag tape.)
4.
Enter ID No. (Ser#).

Select No.= 2
** FILE No.= 0
Enter IN No.= 3
** FILE No.= 1
Enter ID No.= (<END>)
Dump start OK? <0:OK, 1:No> 0
** DUMPED FILE No.= 0
** FILE No.= 0
Enter ID No.= _
236
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063
2-11 MT DUMP/LOAD (continued)

Load (from MT to Disk)
Note
Verify that the MT unit is ON LINE (READY).
1.
Select 2 (LOAD).
2.
Select MT START FILE No.
3.
The example below shows:

A FILE No.0 on MT is loaded to Series No.30 (Station#:0, Study#:0, Ser#:30, Acq#:1, Image#:1).
The software waits for the input of a Series No.(destination) for the next File No.1 on MT.
Note
The File No. displayed thereafter automatically increases by 1 every time a new file is loaded.
*** LOAD (FROM MT TO DISK) ***
Enter MT START FILE No.= 0
** FILE No.= 0
Enter SERIES No.= 30
** FILE No.= 1
Enter SERIES No. = (<END>)
Load start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO> 0
*** LOADED SERIES No.= 30
** FILE No.= 1
Enter SERIES No.= _
237
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063
2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD

This function dumps raw data files from DISK to MOD, or loads raw data files from MOD to DISK.
Insert a magnetic optical disk in the MoD unit.
Select 11 (MOD DUMP/LOAD) from the Support menu.
** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MOD) **
1. DUMP (DISK > MOD)
2. LOAD (MOD > DISK)
3. DIRECTORY
4. INITIALIZE
Select No.=
Dump (from Disk to MOD)
Note
Verify that the magnetic optical disk is write enables.
1.
Select 1 (DUMP). The volume name of the magnetic optical disk is displayed.
*** DUMP (FROM DISK TO MOD) ***
Volume Name = XXXX
The file No. (0, 1, 2,...) on the MOD are displayed, where raw data files will be dumped.
** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***
** FILE No.= XX
Enter ID No. [00:00000.01.01;01] = _
2.
Enter the ID No. of the raw data file, and then the file No. is updated, waiting for another file ID No. By pressing
<END>, the dump procedure starts with the following message.
Dump Start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO> 0
** DUMP STAR
** DUMPED FILE No.= XX
** DUMPED FILE No.= XX
:
:
** XX Files dumped **
Software stars the dump procedure with File name ORAW:0...RAWn. VR(n=0, 1, 2,....=FILE No.).
238
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD (continued)

Load (from MOD to Disk)
1.
Insert the magnetic optical disk into the MOD unit.
2.
Select 2 (LOAD). The volume name of the magnetic optical disk is displayed.
*** LOAD (FROM MOD TO DISK) ***
volume Name = xxxx
3.
Enter the file No. (0, 1, 2, ...) within the MOD, from which the raw data will be loaded onto the hard disk.
Enter MOD START FILE No.= _
** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***
** FILE No.= XX
Enter SERIES No.= _
4.
Enter the Series No. of the raw data file (the ID No. of the raw data files which will be loaded onto the disk are
0:0.XX.1;1 (Sta:Std.Ser.Acq;Img, i.e., other than the Series No. are fixed)). The file No. is updated, waiting for
another file Series No. By pressing [END], the load procedure starts with the following message.
Load Start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO> 0
** LOAD START
** LOADED SERIES No.= XX
** LOADED SERIES No.= XX
:
:
** XX Files loaded **
239
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD (continued)

Directory
1.
To display the raw data file directory on the MOD, select 3 (DIRECTORY).
** RAW DATA FILE DIRECTORY **

FILE#
0
1
2
.
.
STUDY
12345
12345
12345
SER
01
02
03
AQ
01
01
01
HF
H
H
H
STM
2.7
2.7
2.7
AZM
000
000
000
TBL
+0
+0
+0
.
.
THK
10
10
10
FOV
25
25
25
KV
120
120
120
MA FCS
60
60
60
DATE & TIME

1992/07/01 12:34:56
1992/07/01 12:44:56
1992/07/01 12:54:56
Initialize
1.
To initialize a MOD, select 4 (INITIALIZE). The volume name of the present MOD is displayed.
** MOD INITIALIZE (RAW DATA ONLY) **
Volume Name = XXXX
Initialize OK? <0:Yes, 1:No> _
Note
The MOD is initialized with volume name ORAW.
240
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
2-13 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS

This program performs the same scan and data checks as the Warmup scan sequence. The parameter ranges
described below are checked:
1.
Enter 12 (Warm Up Error Analysis) in the Support menu to display the (warmup) scan parameter shown below:
*** WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS ***
AXIAL SCAN
SCAN TIME
THICKNESS
XG, ROTOR
KV
MA
CW/CCW
NO. OF SCAN
2.
4.5 sec
10 mm
XG ON
120 kV
40 mA
CCW
1
Press the guide lamps ([SET] and [START]) to perform the scan.
The results of data checks are shown as below:
REF CH.
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
MAX
MIN
AVE
X.XXXXX
X.XXXXX
X.XXXXX
XXX ch
XXX ch
HIGHPASS MAX
MIN
AVE
X.XXXXX
X.XXXXX
X.XXXXX
XXX ch
XXX ch
S.D.
X.XXXXX
X.XXXXX
X.XXXXX
XXX ch
XXX ch
RATIO
MAX
MIN
AVE
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
R1 22
R23 44
(MIN=9000)
(MAX=5000)
(MIN=0.90)
(MAX=1.10)
(MIN=0.01)
(MAX=+0.01)
(MIN=0.00)
(MAX=0.02)
The values in parentheses are the tolerances. If some channels give the same MAX or MIN values, the smallest
channel number is shown.
241
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
2-13 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS (continued)

3.
You can examine each channels calculated data (Ratio, Highpass, and S.D.) displayed on the screen, and store
the data to a mean file. Select a type of calculated data you want to examine.
** KIND OF DATA ***
1. RATIO
2. HIGHPASS
3. S.D.
Select No.= 1
** DISPLAY/FILING**
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= _
a. DISPLAY:
This selection shows each channels calculated data on the screen. Select 1 (DISPLAY) from the DISPLAY/
FILING menu.
Select No.= 1
Select CHANNEL No.(1) = _
Press [RTN] to see data of the first 104 channels (Ch.1 to Ch.104). To see subsequent channel data, enter a
channel number, and that channels data is shown in the first line of the table, followed by data of the following
channels. The number is parentheses is the default number.
CHANNEL
RATIO
0001
+0.9991
0005
+1.0001
+0.9994
+1.0000
+1.0003
+1.0000
+0.9989
+0.9991
0097
0101
+1.0000
+.09999
+1.0004
+1.0001
+1.0000
+1.0001
+1.0000
+1.0001
Select cHANNEL No.(105) = _

b. STORE FILE:
This selection stores the calculated data to a mean file. Enter a file No. (1 16) and a comment (40 characters
maximum).
Select No.= 2
** STORE FILE **
Enter COMMENT = WARM UP RATIO
** STORE END
242
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063
2-14 MTF SURVEY

The MTF SURVEY menu calculated MTF data from an image of a wire embedded in the QA phantom. In this menu,
store the calculated data to a mean file, and analyze it using the Support Display.
Before entering this menu, scan a wire in the QA phantom, reconstruct using an appropriate algorithm you wish to
examine, view the image, and use Report Cursor to note the wire center values.
1.
Enter Image ID No.

** MTF SURVEY **
Enter IMAGE ID <XX:XXXXX.XX.XX;XX> = _
If there is not an image of the ID entered, the following message is displayed:
** IMAGE NOTHING
2.
Enter the wire center values. The values should have been noted with using the Report Cursor function.
WIRE CENTER X (Pixel)= _
WIRE CENTER Y (Pixel)= _
3.
Enter the area size (default: 32).

AREA SIZE <8/16/32/64/128 (pixel)> (32)= _
Use Set Cursor to confirm that the designated area does not overlay phantom edges. If the entered value is
not to the second power, the following message appears.
** INVALID ENTRY
If the designated area (the center of it is the wire centers) cannot be contained within the image, the following
message appears.
** AREA TOO LARGE
4.
Enter the edge width (for calculating CT# of water used for offset correction) (default: 4).
EDGE (Pixel) (4)= _
When the entered value is less than half the designated area, the following message is displayed.
** JUST A MOMENT PLEASE **
If the value is more than half the designated area, the following message is displayed.
** EDGE TOO LARGE **
243
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
2-14 MTF SURVEY (continued)

5.
Enter a graph type (default: 3).

SELECT GRAPH TYPE (1:STND/ 2:BONY/ 3:MANUAL)= _
When you select 1 (STND), the maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) is 8 LP/cm.
When you select 2 (BONY), the maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) is 16 LP/cm.
When you select 3 (MANUAL), enter a maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) (default: 12).
Enter MAX FREQUENCY (LP/cm)= _
6.
Store the file to graphically view using Support Display.

** STORE FILE **
Enter MEAN FILE No.<116>= _
Enter COMMENT = _
** START
** STORE END
244
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063

SUPPORT DISPLY
3-1
FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY
Use SUPPORT DISPLAY to analyze raw data files or mean files created in Support programs by displaying the images (these are not backprojected images, but channelview images) or graphs.
Select 2 (SUPPORT DISPLAY) from the Maintenance menu to display the following screen:
Illustration 31
Ch.1
Support Display Screen

Channel
Ch.512
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=1000
MAGNIFY
=1
View
View 1
Information
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Image Field
(ChannelView Image)
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW1
View 512
Menu
Message
The Image filed (see illustration 31) comprises a 512 x 512 matrix. The horizontal axis in the image field indicates
channels, and the vertical axis indicates views, as shown. Since a raw data file contains data of beyond Ch.512 and
View 512, the image filed can not show all the data of a raw data file. Use Start Position (2) to change the Channel
and View start positions.
31
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-1
2242063
FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY (continued)
A raw data file can be illustrated as below. A raw data file is a twodimensional type file; a channel has data at each
view. Data is shown as a height of pillars in the illustration. On the other hand, a mean file is onedimensional; a channel has one data.
Illustration 32
Raw Data File and Mean File
RAW DATA FILE
MEAN FILE
Data
Data
Channel
Channel
View
32
SYSTEM
REV 0
3-1
2242063
FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY (continued)
The followings are the menus provided.

1. FILE SELECTION
Choose one of four files (three raw data files plus one file that contains up to 16 mean files)
created in Support programs.
2. START POSITION
You may assign any channel No. and view No. to the Start Position location.
(upper left corner of the image filed)
3. RANGE
You can specify a range within the data range (1000000 1000000), and only the data
failing within this specified range are grayshaded on the image field.
4. ROI
Move the square cursor over a region of interest and the software calculates and displays
its Mean, S.D.(Standard Deviation), Maximum, and Minimum data.
5. MAGNIFY
Position the cursor over region of interest and then select a Mag factor from x2 to x10 to
magnify the channelview image area surrounding the cursor. Or, select a Reduction factor from x1/2 to x1/10 to reduce the channelview image; in this function you specify the
channel and view numbers for the upper left corner of the reduced image.
6. PROFILE (H)
Position the cursor over a view of interest and software superimposes a graph of data of
each channel over the image. The specifies Minimum and Maximum data values determine axis graduation.
7. PROFILE (V)
Position the cursor over a channel of interest and software superimposes a graph of data
at each view over the image. The specified Minimum And Maximum data values determine
axis graduation.
8. HISTOGRAM
Position the square cursor over an area of interest and software superimposes a histogram
on the image. You can vary the histograms data range by changing the Minimum and Maximum data values.
9. NUMERICAL
Position the cursor over an area of interest and software superimposes a numerical display
of the data for the cursor position and area surrounding it (9 locations in all) on the image
area.
10. WHERE
Displays the channel No. and view No. indicated by the cursor position.
11. SET CURSOR
Enter a channel No. and view No. via the keyboard, and software moves the cursor to the
position on the image screen.
12. ERASE
Erases any graphs, lines, or numeric data, produced by programs described above from
the image.
13. GRID
Software graduates the channel and view axes, or it also draws grid lines on the image field
according to the graduations.
33
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-2
1.
2242063
HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY

Select 2 (SUPPORT DISPLAY) from the Maintenance menu.
The Support Display screen appears on the image monitor. The right side of the screen displays Support Display
menus. Software automatically selects File Selection (1) when you first enter Support Display.
2.
Press [Return] and enter the file name.

Software refuses to accept any other menu selection until you select a file. After you enter the file name, you
can choose any of the following programs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No.= _
Note
D Press the [END] key to en the current program and make another selection from the menu.
Press the [END] key at the menu level to end Support Display and return to the Maintenance menu.
D When you make an unacceptable entry, the following message appears:
** INVALID ENTRY
D The following message is displayed when a system error occurs. Software control shifts one level higher,
waiting for a selection from the Display Support menu or the Maintenance menu.
** ERROR XXXXXXXX
(ERROR CODE)
D If the entered parameters exceed the specified range, the following message is displayed, and software
waits for entry of appropriate parameters.
** RANGE ERROR
34
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-2
2242063
HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY (continued)
General Procedure
NOTE: First do the File Selection before using
other Support Display function
(1) FILE SELECTION
(2) START POSITION

(Defaults Channel No.:1, View No.:1)
(3) RANGE
(Defaults MIN:0, MAX:1)
MEAN FILE DISPLAY

(6)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
PROFILE (H)
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
RAW DATA FILE DISPLAY

(6) (7)
(4)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
PROFILE (H) (V)

ROI
(5)
MAGNIFY
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
35
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-3
2242063
ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES
The following examples of images (channelview images) show how raw data looks when the reconstructed images
from these raw data files contain typical artifacts Ring, Shower, and Streak, respectively.
Ring Artifact
One channel consistently gives abnormal data at every view.
Illustration 33
Ring Artifact
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=1000
MAGNIFY
=1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW1
36
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-3
2242063
ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES (continued)
Shower Artifact
Illustration 34
Shower Artifact
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=1000
MAGNIFY
=1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW1
Streak Artifact
One channel gives abnormal data at one view
Illustration 35
Streak Artifact
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=1000
MAGNIFY
=1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW1
37
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-4
2242063
FILE SELECTION
1.
Select menu 1 (FILE SELECTION) from the Display Support menu.
2.
Enter a file name

Note
D For a file name, see the following Files Viewed by Support Display.
D If you enter a incorrect file name, the following message appears even though file exists:
** INVALID FILE
D If you enter the name of a nonexistent file, the following message appears:
** FILE NOTHING
3.
Enter MIN and MAX values for RANGE.
The following screen appears.
The entered file name appears in the upper right corner of the screen (see illustration 36).
If the system selects this menu automatically (immediately after you enter Support Display),
then you must specify the data range; refer to Section 3-6, Range.
Illustration 36
File Selection
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=1000
MAGNIFY
=1
Displayed Items
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX = 1000
38
Step 2
Step 3
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-4
2242063
FILE SELECTION (continued)

Illustration 37
Creation of Mean and Raw Data Files

Maintenance
Mean File Directory

Mean File No.
Support
Raw Data File Directory

File ID No.
OffLine Scan
Statistics
Offset Average
Mean File
No.
FAN
Max, Min,
Mean S.D.
Original
Raw Data File No.
Mean File No.

Calculation with Mean File
Calculation with Raw Data
Mean File No.

Original
Max, Min,
Mean S.D.
Raw Data File No.

Mean File No.
Maintenance
Support Display
39
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-4
2242063
FILE SELECTION (continued)
Support Display can be used for any raw data files listed in RAW DATA FILE DIRECTORY (Support program) or any
files stored in OFF LINE SCAN; For this, these raw data files should be stored in STATISTICS. In sTATISTICS, a raw
data file can be shored to any of No. 1 3.
Support Display can also be used for any mean files listed in MEAN FILE DIRECTORY, or stored in STATISTICS,
CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE, OR CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA.
For example of storing a raw data file;
a. Enter the STATISTICS program.
b. Select ORIGINAL in the FAN menu.
c. Store the raw data file to any of No. 1 3
In Support Display, use the following file names for FILE SELECTION.
All the mean files are stored in a file named SUPMEAN, since a mean file only takes storage space for one view.
File Name
Raw Data File & Mean File
SUPRAW 1
Raw Data File No.1
SUPRAW 2
Raw Data File No.2
SUPRAW 3
Raw Data File No.3
SUPMEAN
View 1
View 2
Mean File 1
Mean File 2
View 16
Mean File 16
Note
You can shorten the file names as below:
SUPRAW 1
SUPRAW 2
SUPRAW 3
SUPMEAN
310
R1
R2
R3
M
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-5
2242063
START POSITION
The upper left corner of the image filed is the location for the first channel No. and view No. (start position) of the
displayed image. By default, Channel 1 and View 1 are assigned to the start position, but a different start position
channel and/or view can be entered using this menu.
1.
Select 2 (START POSITION).
2.
Enter the channel No. and view No. as a start position.

The entered parameters are displayed in the upper right corner of the CRT.
Note
D The following inquiry appears for a raw data file:
CHANNEL =
VIEW =
D The following appears for the SUPMEAN file. Enter 1 16 for DATA. (The SUPMEAN file contains 16
mean files in View 1 16.)
CHANNEL =
VIEW =
Illustration 38
Start Position
Start Position
Channel
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL = 250
VIEW
= 10
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=1000
MAGNIFY
=1
View
Displayed Items
Default:Ch1
View1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 2
CHANNEL
= 250
VIEW
= 10
311
Step 1
Step 2
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-6
2242063
RANGE
Data at each point on the image filed are depicted as shades of gray. The data range of a raw data file is between
1000000 and 1000000, and a specified range within the data range translates into between 1000 and 3000 gray
levels, which are then displayed on the image field; that is , after you specify the MIN and MAC values, the specified
range is expanded (or reduced) to the 1000 3000 range. See illustration 39.
Illustration 39
Range and Gray Level
1000000
RAW DATA
MIN
MAX
1000000
GRAY LEVEL
1000
3000
1.
Select 3 (RANGE).
2.
Enter MIN and MAX values. The following screen appears.

Note
Software accepts any MIN and MAX values between 1000000 to +1000000, as long as the MIN
value is less than the MAX value. The MIN and MAX values are displayed in the upper right quadrant
of the screen. For example, enter MIN = 0 and MAX = 1000.
Because the default range is relatively narrow and the levels are low, the typical image has offset
views like illustration 310, with the rest of the image being (evenly) bright white.
Illustration 310
Range
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL = 250
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=1000
MAGNIFY
=1
Offset
View
Displayed Items
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 3
MIN
=
0
MAX = 1000
312
Step 1
Step 2
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-7
2242063
ROI
Use this menu to calculate the statistical information of an area enclosed by a square cursor.
1.
Display the square cursor on the screen by pressing the [Crsr] key and [f/j] key. Use the trackball to size and
position the cursor over a region of interest.
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding ROI and also do not position the cursor out of range.
otherwise, the following message appears.
** INVALID CURSOR
2.
Select menu 4 (ROI).

The software calculates and displays the statistical data (MEAN, S.D., MAX, AND MIN) in the lower right quadrant of the image field.
The cursors size and position are displayed in the upper right quadrant of the screen.
Illustration 311
ROI
Step 2
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=3000
MAGNIFY
=1
CURSOR
CHANNEL
= 260
VIEW
= 292
SIZE X
= 52
SIZE Y
= 42
Displayed Items
DISPLAY SUPPORT
MEAN
S.D.
MAX
MIN
: 6.034418E + 02
: 2.436565E + 01
: 6.635000E + 02
: 5.385000E + 02
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 4
Step 1
Displayed Items
313
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-8
2242063
MAGNIFY
Use this menu to magnify the image up to 10 times (x1 to x10).

1.
Position the crosshair over a region of interest.

Note
Position first the cursor before commanding MAGNIFY and also do not position the cursor out of
range, otherwise, the following message appears.
** INVALID CURSOR
2.
Select 5 (MAGNIFY) to enlarge the area surrounding the + cursor.

Illustration 312
Magnify
Step 1
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=3000
MAGNIFY
=2
Displayed Items
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 5
MAG <110>
</2 /10> =2
314
Step 2
Step 3
SYSTEM
REV 0
3-8
3.
2242063
MAGNIFY (continued)
Enter a magnification factor.
The magnification factor is displayed in the upper right quadrant of the screen.
Note
D You can also reduce the image within the range of x1/2 to x1/10 to view the entire image. If you reduce
the image by a 1/8 factor, foe example, enter:
/8 [RTN]
Then specify the channel N0. and view No. which determines the position of the upper left corner of the
reduced image. The channel No. and view No. selectable depend on the reduction factor. If you selected
1/8 for the reduction factor, for example, then the following range is shown:
SAMPLING ORIGIN
CHANNEL
<18>= _
VIEW
<18>= _
You can reduce a mean file only in the horizontal direction.
D You can only magnify an image once (You cannot magnify an already magnified image).
4.
To return to normal size display, select menu 1 (FILE SELECTION) or specify a magnification factor of 1; you
do not need a cursor for either execution.
315
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-9
2242063
PROFILE (H)
Use this menu to display a graph of data of channels at a specified view. If a channel gave abnormal data during a
scan, the graph will show a significant deviation at this channel. Use this menu to track down ring artifacts.
1.
Position the cursor over a view of interest using the trackball (the horizontal position (channel) is irrelevant).
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding PROFILE (H) and also do not position the cursor out of
** INVALID CURSOR
2.
Select menu item 6 (PROFILE H).
3.
Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the amplitude range of the plot.(Data out of this range is not plotted.
See illustration 313)
Software displays the specified MIN and MAX values in scientific notation from above the Display Support menu.
Illustration 313
Data Range for Profile (H)
MAX.
Data
MIN.
Channel
316
SYSTEM

REV 0
3-9
2242063
PROFILE (H) (continued)

Adjust the MIN and MAX values (by narrowing or widening the range or shifting the level of the range) to display
a more descriptive curve in the following way:
4.
a. Press the [End] key to end the Profile program.

b. Enter 12 (ERASE) to clear the screen graph.
c. Repeat steps 2. and 3.
5.
Change the START POSITION to draw a graph for other channels, since the program only graphs 512 channel
at a time
Illustration 314
Profile (H)
Step 1
Range
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=3000
MAGNIFY
=1
CURSOR
CHANNEL
= 353
VIEW
= 92
DATA MIN
0.000000e + 00
DATA MAX
1.000000e + 04
Displayed Items
View 92 is selected.
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 6
DATAMIN
= 0.000000e + 00
DATA MAX
= 1000 j
Step 5
Step 2
Step 3,4
Channel
317
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
3-10 PROFILE (V)

Use this menu to display a graph of data of a specified channel. If a channel gave abnormal data during one or more
views, the graph will show a significant deviation at these views. Use this menu to troubleshoot streak artifacts.
1.
Position the cursor over a channel of interest using the trackball (the vertical position (view) is irrelevant).
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding PROFILE(V) and also do not position the cursor out of
** INVALID CURSOR
2.
Select menu item 7 (PROFILE V).
3.
Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the amplitude range of the plot. (Data out of this range is not plotted.
See illustration 315)
Software displays the specifies MIN and MAX values in scientific notation from above the Display support menu.
Illustration 315
Data Range for Profile (V)
Data
MIN.
MAX.
View
318
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
3-10 PROFILE (V) (continued)

4.
Adjust the MIN and MAX values (by narrowing or widening the range or shifting the level of the range) to display
a more descriptive curve in the following manner.
a. Press the [End] key to en the Profile program.
b. Enter 12 (ERASE) to clear the screen graph.
c. Repeat steps 2. and 3.
Change the START POSITION (2) to draw a graph for other views, since the program only graphs 512 views
at a time.
Illustration 316
Profile (V)
Step 1
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=3000
MAGNIFY
=1
CURSOR
CHANNEL
= 433
VIEW
= 96
DATA MIN
4.000000e + 02
DATA MAX
8.000000e + 04
Displayed Items
Channel 433 is
selected.
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
View
5.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 7
DATAMIN
= 4.000000e + 02
DATA MAX
= 800 j
Step 5
Step 2
Step 3,4
Range
319
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
3-11 HISTOGRAM
This program draws a histogram on an area enclosed by the box cursor. The histogram shows a frequency distribution
of data within your specified MIN and MAX range.
1.
Position the box cursor over an area of interest using the trackball.
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding HISTOGRAM and also do not position the cursor out
of range, otherwise, the following message appears.
** INVALID CURSOR
2.
Change the box size using the [Size] key.
3.
Select menu item 8 (HISTOGRAM).
4.
Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the data range for the histogram.
The histogram is drawn automatically. The size and the center location of the square cursor are displayed in
the upper right quadrant of the screen. (The box cursor remains on the image field.)
Illustration 317
Histogram
Step 1,2
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=3000
MAGNIFY
=1
CURSOR
CHANNEL
= 426
VIEW
= 425
SIZE X
= 52
SIZE Y
= 42
DATA MIN
4.000000e + 02
DATA MAX
8.000000e + 04
Displayed Items
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 8
MIN
= 4.000000e + 02
MAX
= 800 j
Step 3
Step 4
Range
320
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
3-12 NUMERICAL
This menu numerically displays data of a location of the cursor and its surrounding locations (nine locations in all) as
illustrated below. This function may be used to determine proper MIN and MAX values for Profile(H) and Profile(V).
Cursor Position
This menu automatically clears the image filed (but leaves the image) before displaying the numerical values, and
highlights the center position.
1.
Position the cursor over a location of interest using the trackball.
2.
select menu item 9 (NUMERICAL).

The cursor location (Channel No. and View No.) is displayed above the display Support menu.
Illustration 318
Numerical
Step 1
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=3000
MAGNIFY
=1
CURSOR
CHANNEL
= 315
VIEW
= 126
Displayed Items
DISPLAY SUPPORT
6.639999e+02
6.644999e+02
6.710000e+02
6.605000e+02
6.630000e+02
6.695000e+02
6.675000e+02
6.590000e+02
6.755000e+02
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 9
Step 2
Note
If you fail to correctly position the cursor, the following message appears:
** INVALID CURSOR
321
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
3-13 WHERE
This menu displays the location information (Channel No. and view No.) of the cursor which you position.
1.
Position the cursor.
2.
Select menu item 10 (WHERE).

The channel No. and view No. of the cursor location are displayed above the Display Support menu.
Illustration 319
Where
Step 1
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=3000
MAGNIFY
=1
CURSOR
CHANNEL
= 314
VIEW
= 142
Displayed Items
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 10
Step 2
Note
If you fail to correctly position the cursor the following message appears:
** INVALID CURSOR
322
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
3-14 SET CURSOR

This menu sets the cursor to the specified location (View No. and Channel No. or Data No.).
1.
Enter 11 (SET CURSOR).
2.
Enter the channel No. and view No. (or data No.) where you want to display the cursor.
The cursor will be displayed at the location.
Note
For a raw data file, enter the following:
CHANNEL =
VIEW
=
For a mean file, enter the following (enter 116 for Data, which corresponds to mean file No.116:
CHANNEL =
VIEW
=
Illustration 320
Set Cursor
Displayed
Cursor
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=3000
MAGNIFY
=1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 11
CHANNEL
= 350
VIEW
= 100
323
Step 1
Step 2
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
3-15 ERASE
This menu removes graphs, numeric data, or histograms superimposed on the image. Normally, the graphics remain
until a new function clears them, or replaces them with other graphics, or you select ERASE. This menu does not erase
the cursor.
1.
select menu item 12 (ERASE).
324
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
3-16 GRID
This menu graduates the channel and view axes and/or draws grid lines according to the graduations on the image
filed.
Note
When displaying the different grid of graduations, first erase the displayed grid using the erase function (menu item 12), then perform the following. If not erased, a new grid is superimposed on the old
one.
1.
Select menu item 13 (GRID).
2.
Enter the graduations for CHANNEL and VIEW axes.

Note
For a raw data file, enter both channel and view graduations.
for a mean file, enter only channel graduation.
If the values below are entered, for example, both axes will be graduated at intervals of 50 values.
(If you magnify the image so that multiple pixels depict each channel and view, the program uses the
center pixel.)
CHANNEL = 50
VIEW
= 50
325
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
3-16 GRID (continued)

3.
Select Grid Type or Axis Type; see below.

Select 0:Yes in response to LINE?, if displaying grid type of graduation.
Select 1:No in response to LINE?, if displaying axis type of graduation.
Grid Type
(Line? 0:Yes)
Axis Type
(Line? 1:No)
Note
The graduations start from Channel = 0, View = 0.
Therefor, if the start position is set to Channel = 101, View = 101 and the graduations are set to Channel = 50, View = 50, for example, the graduations are displayed from Channel = 150, View = 150.
Illustration 321
Grid
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW
=1
RANGE
MIN
=
0
MAX
=3000
MAGNIFY
=1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
FILE SELECTION
START POSITION
RANGE
ROI
MAGNIFY
PROFILE (H)
PROFILE (V)
HISTOGRAM
NUMERICAL
WHERE
SET CURSOR
ERASE
GRID
Select No. = 13
CHANNEL
= 50
VIEW
= 50
LINE? <0:Yes, 1:No> 0
326
Displayed
Grid
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063

OTHERS
4-1
OFFLINE CALIBRATION
This program makes a calibration file from raw data files acquired in offline or online scans. You need the following
raw data:
AIR DATA and PHANTOM DATA
Note
D This program changes the existing calibration file. Save these files to a floppy diskette before you start
this program.
D Gather all the raw data used to make the calibration file under the same conditions, on the same system.
D Perform the air calibration (OffLine) prior to performing the phantom calibration (OffLine).
D To terminate this program during execution, press the [Cancel] key to return to the Maintenance menu.
41
SYSTEM

REV 0
4-1
2242063
OFFLINE CALIBRATION (continued)
1.
Select 3 (OFFLINE CALIBRATION).
2.
An example is shown below:

** OFFLINE CALIBRATION **
RAW DATA FILE MENU
AIR
AIR
(CW)
(CW)
ID No.= 00:1.1.1;1 CR
ID No.= 00:1.1.2;1 CR
PHANTOM
PHANTOM
(CW)
(CCW)
ID No.= 00:1.1.3;1 CR
ID No.= 00:1.1.4;1 CR
PRESS <END> AFTER ENTRY

AIR (CW)
<CALIBRATION FILE MENU>
(FOV 25 cm)
TH
1.
10 mm
2.
5 mm
3.
3 mm
4.
1 mm
(FOV 35 cm)
TH
5.
10 mm
6.
5 mm
7.
3 mm
8.
1 mm
<xx>
<xxyy>
Select No.<xx,yy,zz> = 14 CR
(FOV 42 cm)
TH
9. 10 mm
10.
5 mm
11.
3 mm
12.
1 mm
(Select the CAL files 1, 2, 3, and 4)
Note
If incorrect inputs were made, one of the following messages is displayed:
**
**
**
**
INVALID ENTRY
INVALID RAW DATA (SCOUT)
RAW DATA NOTHING
INVALID SCAN ROTATION
The selected CAL files will be changed.
42
SYSTEM
REV 0
4-2
2242063
CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT
CT Number Adjustment means to change a part of the CAL files with conversion coefficients called and so that
water and air images have CT Numbers 0 and 1000, respectively. The coefficients and are calculated from
scanned images of water and air.
See CT Number Adjustment, of system of the Functional Check / Adjustment manual, for details.
43
SYSTEM

REV 0
4-3
2242063
POST RECON
This program reconstructs an image from the specified raw data on the hard disk.
1.
Select 7 (POST RECON).
2.
An example is shown below:

** POST RECON **
(DEFAULT=00:00000.02.01;01)
enter Raw data ID No.= 0.1.1 CR
STUDY
0000
SER
03
AQ HF
01 H
TYPE STM
CW
2.7
AZM
000
Enter Raw Data ID No. (Study#.Ser#.Acq#) to be

reconstructed
TBL
+0
THK
10
FOV
25
KV MA FCS DATE & TIME

120 40
1992/07/01 12:34:56
SCAN & RECON PARAMETER

NO. OF IMAGE
RECON MODE
RECON CENTERX
RECON CENTERY
RECON FOV
MOTION CORRECTION
WINDOW WIDTH
WINDOW LEVEL
ENHANCE
HF/FF
ORIENTATION
ANATOMY
SCAN FOV
THICKNESS
KV
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1
STND
0.0 (mm)
0.0 (mm)
25.0 (cm)
ON
500
40
OFF
H
SP
HEAD
25.0 (cm)
10.0 (mm)
120 (kV)
Parameter OK ? <0:Yes, 1:No> 0 CR
Change Scan & Recon Parameters if necessary.
(DEFAULT=00000.01.01;01)
Enter Image ID No.= 0.1.1;2 CR
Enter image ID No.(Study#.Ser#.Acq#;Image#)
Note
The image ID No. must be a new number. When the image No. already exists, Post Recon can not
proceed.
During Post Reconstruction, Que xx(xx) is displayed on the upper corner of the touch panel.
3.
Press [END] key to exit.
4.
To display the reconstructed image, enter the image ID No. in the Patient List Menu.
Note
When Auto View function is set to ON (the indication V is displayed on the lower right corner of the
image area), the image will be automatically displayed after Post Recon is executed.
44
SYSTEM

REV 0
4-4
2242063
MT RECOVERY
This menu recovers MT images which can not be retrieved due to a tape Parity Error or corrupted directory. This program only copies MT images to the disk. To store the images back on a magnetic tape, enter Image File Management
after finishing the MT Recovery.
Select 7 (MT RECOVERY).
*** MT RECOVERY ***
1. PARITY MT RECOVERY
2. MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY
3. FILE No. ENTRY RECOVERY
1.
PARITY MT RECOVERY:
This menu recovers tapes with corrupted MT directories.
a. Select 1 (PARITY MT RECOVERY).
The recovery procedure is started.
Select No.= 1 CR
RECOVERED IMAGE ID = 00:00009.01.05:01
:
2.
MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY:

Use this menu to recover an incorrectly initialized tape or the images stored after misinitialization occurred.
In the later case, not all the images can be recovered since Image files in the first part of MT might have been
destroyed.
a. Select 2 (MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY).
The recovery procedure is started.
Select No.= 2 CR
:
45
SYSTEM
REV 0
4-4
3.
2242063
MT RECOVERY (continued)
FILE No. ENTRY RECOVERY:
This menu lets you select the images to recover.
a. Select 3 (FILE NO. ENTRY RECOVERY).
b. Input File No. to recover.
Select No.= 3 CR
File No. 7 <XXXXXX> 1718 CR
File No.: file serial No. from the head of Tape.

TOTAL RECOVERY IMAGE No.= 002
File No. Input Format:

i.
File No. XXX to be recovered:

File No.? <XXXXXX> XXX CR
ii.
File No. 0 XXX to be recovered:

iii.
File No. XXX Last file to be recovered:

iv.
File No. XXX YYY to be recovered:

File No.? <XXXXXX> XXXYYY CR
v.
File No. 0 Last file to be recovered:

File No.? <XXXXXX> CR
46
SYSTEM
REV 0
4-5
2242063
OD SWEEPER
Use this menu when the system displays the following messages:
ER440
ER441
ER442
OD Study inf. Nothing

OD Image inf. Nothing
OD Study inf. Incorrect
You nay see these messages when someone turned OFF the system during OD operation. In this case, certain OD
information may be corrupted. The OD sweeper function tries to recover the oD from the inadvertent shutdown.
Note
D The OD sweeper function continues processing data, even if system errors occur; the OD SWEEPER tries
to recover as much data as possible.
D It is impossible to manage OD information while OD SWEEPER is operating.
D It is impossible to dismount the OD cartridge while OD SWEEPER is operating.
1.
Select 8 (OD SWEEPER).

OD SWEEPER program starts and displays the following messages. OD information might be recovered automatically.
** OD COHERENCE CHECK START **
**
**
**
**
STUDY INF
IMAGE INF
FILE
STUDY INF
DELETE
DELETE
DELETE
REPAIR
xx:xxxx
xx:xxxx,xx.xx;xx
$DMP:0. WRXXXXX.IXXXXX.VR
XX:XXXXX
** OD COHERENCE CHECK END **
47
SYSTEM
REV 0
4-6
2242063
OD STUDY RECOVERY
This menu can be used for restoring the Study Information destroyed by a powerdown during storing images onto
the optical disk. (However, not all information can be recovered.)
Hospital Name, Patient ID and Patient Personal Data need to be entered to rebuild the Study Information.
Note
D If the original images still exist on the hard disk, its the best way to store the images onto the optical disk
again after running the OD SWEEPER menu.
D If the maximum number of images or acquisitions in one Study on the OD is larger than that of the system,
this recovery function can not be performed.
1.
Insert the optical disk cartridge to be recovered into the drive.
2.
Select 9 (OD STUDY RECOVERY).

First, the program checks the OD to be recovered.
Note
If there happens to be any problem, the following message will be displayed.
D ** OD NOT READY **
OD status is Offline or On mounting. After checking that it is Mounted on the status display, retry.
D ** ILLEGAL OD **
OD is not the system OD or the scratch OD which can be recognized on this system.
D ** PROTECTED OD **
OD is protected. After removing a protect label, retry.
Then the Model No. (lower 2 digits), the Machine No. and the Study No. of the Study to be recovered is displayed.
3.
Enter the complete model number (4 digits) by referring to the displayed Model No. list.
** OD STUDY RECOVERY **
Model
Machine
Study
: **0C
: 1234
: 00053
Enter Full Model No. (4Digit) = 010C CR

Model No.
: Model Name
0101 : CT 8600
0102 : CT 8800
.
.
48
SYSTEM
REV 0
4-6
4.
2242063
OD STUDY RECOVERY (continued)

It displays the specified Study Information. See below.
Enter the data into the blank column.
Note
Some columns have been recovered automatically by referring to the Image information. They can
also be modified. However, it is not recommended to change the Study Number, Number of Images
and Scan Date.
5.
After completing the Study Information, press the [End] key.

Study Information
Station:Study
Number of Images
Enhance
= 00:00053
= 017
= NO C
Scan Date
Patient ID
Patient Name
Patient Birthday
Patient Sex
Patient Age
Patient Weight
Model Name
Hospital Name
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1989/10/31
0425855150
Michael
1962/02/05
M
27;08
55.0
Ct SYTEC/PROSPEED SERIES
HINO HOSPITAL
OK to Recovery ? <1:Yes, 1:No> 0 CR

6.
Select 0:Yes in response to OK to Recovery ?/

The OD study recovery is started and it takes several minutes finish.
Note
If there happens to be any problem or interruption, the following message will be displayed.
D ** STUDY INF. FULL **
Study Information Area on OD is full. The study can not be recovered any longer.
D ** OD STUDY RECOVERY ERROR END **
Any error occurs during the recovery operation.
D ** OD STUDY RECOVERY CANCELLED **
The CANCEL key is pressed during the recovery operation to cancel.
7.
If there is any other Study to be recovered on the same OD, it will return to step 3.
8.
When all Studies have been recovered, it will finish with the following message.
**OD STUDY RECOVERY END **
9.
Now the OD is Offline. Therefore, eject the cartridge once and reinsert it to the drive to read out images from
the recovered OD.
49
SYSTEM
REV 0
4-7
2242063
TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE
This function sets the parameter that simulates the temperature of the xray tube anode and its case to the maximum
value allowed.
During (offline) manual exposures, the service person should wait the recommended minimum time between exposures. The CPU keeps a running tally of manual exposures, but does not calculate or impose any delays, nor does
it measure the actual heat generated in the xray tube.
Use this TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE function after performing offline exposures if sufficient cooling time for the next
scans is desired.
1.
Select 10 (TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE).
2.
Select 0 (Yes) to set the Anode and Case Temperature to the maximum value.
** TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE **
This program will set the anode and Case Temperature Maximum.
OK? <0:Yes, 1:No> 0 CR
410
SYSTEM
REV 0
4-8
2242063
SERVICE MODE
This menu can be used to set/reset a flag for special service purposes. Currently it sets the following:
D ROI value display
display to on decimal place (flag: OFF)
display to two decimal places (flag: ON)
1.
Select 11 (SERVICE MODE).
2.
Enter 1 to set a flag or enter 0 to reset a flag.

** SERVICE MODE **
Service Mode
= 0 <0:OFF, 1:ON>
New Data =
411
SYSTEM
REV 0
4-9
2242063
SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD
This menu stores the system parameters to a floppy disk or loads them from the floppy disk to the hard disk. The
system had the following parameters:
Station Number Information
Patients Information
Series Description
Scan Parameters
Note
When loading system parameters to the hard disk, be sure that the parameters on the floppy disk
are of the same system, since the system parameters are unique to each system.
Select 12 (SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP & LOAD).
*** SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP & LOAD ***
1. Parameter Dump to FD
2. Parameter Load from FD
0. End
Select No.= _
1.
Parameter Dump to FD
a. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen:
** INSERT BOOT FD
Press <ENTR> to Continue
If you want to Change the FD, Change Now.
(Remove the BOOt floppy and inset

a floppy disk for dump.)

2.
Parameter Load from FD

a. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen:
** INSERT BOOT FD
If you want to Change the FD, Change Now.
(Remove the BOOT floppy and inset

the floppy disk containing the system
parameters.)
412
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063

CLASS C SOFTWARE
5-1
INTRODUCTION
In addition to the Maintenance programs which are described in Section 2 through 4, the following class C programs
are provided by class C software disks.
D Class C Service Tools
D Error Message Help
D Heat Soak
Table 51 shows the part Nos. of Class C Software disks for Error Message Help (volume name:EH00) and Class
C Service Tools (volume name:SV00) to be used according to product.
Table 51
Part No. of Class C Software (EH00 & SV00)

Product
Part No. of SV00
Part No. of EH00
CT Sytec/Sytec i series
2131964
P9190RC
51
SYSTEM

REV 0
5-2
2242063
CLASS C SERVICE TOOLS
The class C service tools contain the following:

D Enhanced Alignment
D Automated CT Number Adjustment
D Automated Post Recon
The volume name of the floppy disk containing the above all is SV00.
5-2-1
Installation and Delete of Software

Note
In the Installation or Delete procedure described below, a message FHS ERROR C2 will be generated after inputting IC, or at the end of procedure. Ignore this message.
Installation (Registration to Maintenance Menu)

Perform the following loading procedure when you use the Service Tool software, if the software has been deleted.
Usually, the software is intentionally removed after being used, and also the software is removed during a system
software versionup or reloading procedure.
1.
Enter the <Management> menu by pressing the [Mgt] key.
2.
Insert the BOOT floppy disk.
3.
Enter $$ and the following prompt will be displayed:

>
4.
Remove the BOOT floppy disk, and insert the SV00 disk.
5.
Enter the following at the > prompt (CR means [Enter]):

>FN SV00:0.&.SV00INST.CF CR
>IC CR
>RT CR
52
SYSTEM

REV 0
5-2
2242063
CLASS C SERVICE TOOLS (continued)
5-2-1
Installation and Delete of Software (continued)
Delete (from Maintenance Menu)

Perform the following, if necessary, after using the software (this may be required so that only service engineers owning this class C floppy disk can use this software):
1.
2.
3.

>
4.
Remove the BOOT disk and insert the SV00 disk.
5.

>FN SV00:0.&.SV00DEL.CF CR
>IC CR
>RT CR
53
SYSTEM

REV 0
5-2
5-2-2
2242063

Enhanced Alignment
ENHANCED ALIGNMENT is a program for performing the adjustment of the following:

D Iso Center Alignment
D Filter Center Alignment
This program allows simpler procedures. The fileld engineer repeats scans and adjustments according to the instructions displayed on the CRT monitor intil the specifications are met, as illustrated below:
Start
Scan(s)
Within Specifications
?
No
Adjustment
Yes
END
54
SYSTEM
REV 0
5-2
2242063
5-2-2
Enhanced Alignment (continued)
Operation
Select <Enhanced Alignment> from the Maintenance menu.
** ENHANCED ALIGNMENT ***
ALIGNMENT MENU
1. TUBE ALIGNMENT
2. BOWTIE FILTER ALIGNMENT
Select No.= _
1.
TUBE ALIGNMENT:
a. Remove the Bowtie Filter.
b. Select TUBE ALIGNMENT from the Enhanced Alignment menu.
c. Perform air axial scans, according to the instructions displayed.
d. Perform axial scans on a pin, according to the instructions displayed.
In this step a pin (a screw driver, etc.) is to be placed on the scan plane.
e. Adjust the xray tube alignment, according to the instructions.
2.
BOWTIE FILTER ALIGNMENT:

a. Remove the Bowtie Filter.
b. Select BOWTIE FILTER ALIGNMENT from the Enhanced alignment menu.
c. Perform an air axial scan without bowtie filter, according to the instructions displayed.
d. Perform an air axial scan with bowtie filter, according to the instructions displayed.
e. adjust the filter alignment, according to the instructions.
55
SYSTEM
REV 0
5-2
2242063
5-2-3
Automated CT Number Adjustment
As shown below, almost all of CT No. adjustment steps are automatically performed by this program. The scans are
performed only using the 25cm FOV (the minimum one); however, the CT No. adjustment is performed for all the
FOVs.
Water Phantom Centering
Enter <Automated CT Number Adjustment>
Raw and Image Data Space Check, Recon Queue Check
Scans
CT No. Measurement of ROIs

Automatic
Calculations ( and )
Cal File Modification
CT No. Verification
1.
Attach the phantom holder to the end of the cradle, and set the 25cm water phantom to the phantom holder.
2.
Move the cradle to center the phantom on the scan plane, and press the Zero button tn the Gantry Control Panel.
3.
Select <Automated CT No. Adjustment > from the Maintenance menu.

Data Space Check and Recon Queue Check
At first, the program reserves data spaces for raw data files and image files, and then checks if raw data files
exist in recon queue. If required data spaces can not be reserved, or data exists in recon queue, this program
can not proceed.
56
SYSTEM

REV 0
5-2
5-2-3
4.
2242063
Automated CT Number Adjustment (continued)
Perform scans.
First, water phantom scans are performed, and then air scans are performed after the cradle is automatically
moved (100mm away from the Gantry).
The following scan parameters are used for scans.
Water Phantom Scans
mA (mA)
FOV (cm)
25
Scan Time (sec)
CT Sytec
Plus
3000i
4000i
CT Sytec
S
2000i
120
100
80
120
100
80
120
160
130
120
160
130
120
160
160
Thickness
(mm)
KV (kV)
10
CT Sytec
Plus
3000i
4000i
CT Sytec
S
2000i
2.7
3.6
Air Scans
Scan Time (sec)
FOV (cm)
Thickness
(mm)
KV (kV)
mA (mA)
120
40
CT Sytec
Plus
3000i
4000i
CT Sytec
S
2000i
2.7
3.6
10
5
25
3
2
1
CT No. Calculation
Calculated CT Number are displayed one by one on the CRT monitor. The NEW CT Numbers are calculated
using the modifies CAL files, and the OLD CT Numbers are calculated using the old ones.
5.
Verify that the NEW CT Numbers are normal (Air: 10005, Water: 03).
57
SYSTEM

REV 0
5-2
5-2-4
2242063

Automated Post Recon
This program automatically tests the operation of post reconstruction a number of times.
First, select a raw data file on which post recon test is performed.
and then, input the image ID which is correctly reconstructed from the raw data file (called reference image).
Recon operation on the selected raw data files is performed and then the resulted image is compared with the reference image to check if they are identical. IF not identical, the reconstructed image is stored (called error image).
This check repeats the number of times specified (up to 10000) or until 10 (maximum) error images are stored, as
illustrated below.
Start
Input or Raw Data (=A)
Input of Reference Image (=B)
Recon ON A (=C)
No
B=C?
Store of C
Yes
No
All Tests Finished ?

Yes
END
58
SYSTEM
REV 0
5-2
5-2-4
1.
2242063
Automated Post Recon (continued)
Select <Automated Post Recon Test> from the Maintenance menu.

Number of Error Images
At first, the program reserves data space for storing error images. The number of image spaces is usually 10
maximum.
2.
Enter the Raw data ID.

Scan and Recon Parameter display
After the raw data ID is properly input, the scan and recon parameters on the raw data are displayed.
3.
Change the Scan and Recon Parameters, if required. Normally for this <Automated Post Recon Test>, do not
change the parameters.
4.
Enter the reference image ID.
5.
Enter the number of tests to be repeated (iteration). The maximum number is 10000.
6.
Press the [Enter] key to start the test.
59
SYSTEM

REV 0
5-3
2242063
ERROR MESSAGE HELP
When a system error occurs, the error message information only consists of the error name, error number, and other
limited information. The message does not include detailed information on the error (Contents) or items which can
be done for troubleshooting (Action). this ERROR MESSAGE HELP provides these Contents and appropriate Action
on the display screen. This function is available from the service maintenance menu, after installing the ERROR MESSAGE HELP disk (Volume name: EH00) to the system.
5-3-1

Note

Perform the following loading procedure when you use the Error Message Help, if the software has been deleted.
Usually, the software is intentionally removed after being used, and also the software is removed during a system
software versionup or reloading procedure.
1.
2.
3.

>
4.
Remove the BOOT disk and insert the EH00 disk.
5.

>FN EH00:0.&.EHINST.CF CR
>IC CR
>RT CR
510
SYSTEM

REV 0
5-3
2242063
ERROR MESSAGE HELP (continued)
5-3-1
Delete (from Maintenance Menu)

1.
2.
3.

>
4.
Remove the BOOT disk and insert the EH00 disk.
5.

>FN EH00:0.&.EHDEL.CF CR
>IC CR
>RT CR
511
SYSTEM

REV 0
5-3
5-3-2
1.
2242063
Operation
Select Error Message Help from the Maintenance menu.

The screen should appear as shown below.
The Error Message screen consists of three areas: Window1, Window2, and Window3. In Window1, a list
of errors are shown which are also displayed on the Status screen.
** ERROR HELP **
ERXXX
ERXXX
ERXXX
HH:MM
HH:MM
HH:MM
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
ERXXX
ERXXX
HH:MM
HH:MM
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
(Time)
(Error Name)
(System Error)
(Error Number)
Contents=
(Details)
Action
(Remedy)
Y/B:Up/Down
ERR_NO=
SYSTEM ERROR CODE=
(Error Number)
A/":Change Entry Mode
Press <END> to End
512
LCP=XX TN=XXXX
LCP=XX TN=XXXX
(Logical CPU) (Task)
(Window2)
MSG_NO=
(Message Number)
(Window3)
LCP=XX
LCP=XX
LCP=XX
(Window1)
TN=XXXX
TN=XXXX
TN=XXXX
SYSTEM
REV 0
5-3
5-3-2
2242063
Operation (continued)
Displaying Error Information

Three ways of displaying error information are provided, as described below:
D Displaying error information from the STATUS screen;
Move the cursor to the error row that you want to know about using the Y/B keys in Window1.
Then, press the Return key.
The error message information (Contents and Action) is displayed in Window2. The selected error is
highlighted.
When there is not enough room in Window2 to display the complete information for the error message,
select either Contents or Action using the Shift + Y/B keys, and then the Window2 area can be scrolled
using the Y/B keys.
D Displaying error information from both Error No. and System Error code;
Move the cursor in Window3 to ERR_NO= using the A/" keys, and enter the error number (three digits).
Then move the cursor to SYSTEM ERROR CODE= using the A/" keys, and enter the system error code
(eight digits). The Contents and Action for the error message are displayed in Window2.
D Displaying error information from a Message No.;
Move the cursor in Window2 to MSG_NO= using the A/" keys. Then, enter the message number.
The Contents and Action for the error message are displayed in Window2.
Return to Service Maintenance Menu

Return to the service Maintenance menu by pressing the END key.
513
SYSTEM
REV 0
5-4
2242063
HEAT SOAK
This program can be used for a heat soak procedure when the xray tube is replaced, after performing the <Tube
Calibration> procedure. The Heat Soak function is provided on a floppy disk whose volume name is HTS0 or HTS1.
5-4-1

Note

Perform the following loading procedure when you use the Heat Soak, if the software has been deleted. Usually, the
software is intentionally removed after being used, and also the software is removed during a system software versionup or reloading procedure.
1.
2.
3.

>
4.
Remove the BOOT floppy disk and insert the correct HTS0 (2172802) floppy disk.
5.

>FN HTS0:0.&.HTS0INST.CF CR
>IC CR
>RT CR
6.
Remove the floppy disk.
514
SYSTEM
REV 0
5-4
2242063
HEAT SOAK (continued)
5-4-1
Delete (from Maintenance menu)

1.
2.
3.

>
4.
Remove the BOOT floppy disk and insert the correct HTS0 (2172802) floppy disk.
5.

>FN HTS0:0.&.HTS0DEL.CF CR
>IC CR
>RT CR
6.
Remove the floppy disk.
5-4-2
Operation
The xray tube should be sufficiently cool; Anode/Case Heat should be at 0%.
1.
Set the 42cm Polypropylene Phantom to the phantom holder.
2.
Move the cradle to a position where the phantom is just over the Detector window, using the positioning lights.
Note
This is to reduce xray dose to the detector during the heat soak procedure to protect it.
3.
Select <Heat Soak> from the Support menu.
4.
Perform scans, according to the instructions displayed.

Note
Do not perform a warmup or scans for at least ten minutes after completing this Heat Soak procedure.
515
SYSTEM

blank
2242063
516
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
SECTION 6 MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS
6-1
INTRODUCTION
Display of Message
Any unusual occurrence in the system is reported to the OC Message screen. When an error occurs during normal
operation, the console [Status] key LED flashes and a beep tone sounds. Press the [Status] key to view the Message
screen. The flashing LED stays steadily lit while the Message screen displays. The most recent error is listed last on
the screen. Press [Status] a second time to return to the normal display screen. (The LED turns OFF until the nest
error starts it flashing or you press the [Status] key.)
You can press the [Status] key at any time to view the message screen. The LED stays lit until you press [Status]
a second time to toggle back to the normal display screen.
The system can store 80 lines of error messages.
Format for Message Display

*** ERRXXX
HH:MM
*1
*2
Message (32 CHARACTERS)

*3
Data
LCP=XX
TM=XXX
*5
*6
ADD=XXXXXXXX
*7
(56 CHARACTERS)
*4
*** MSXXX
*1
HH:MM
Message (32 CHARACTERS)
*2
*3
Data
(56 CHARACTERS)
*4
*1)
Error (Message) No.
*2)
The time of Error (Message) generation.

(time:minute)(The actual time the Error (Message) is displayed on the screen.)
*3)
Caption Message. Brief explanation of the Error (Message) No.
*4)
Data (Error Code, etc.)
*5)
Logical CPU No. of CPU which received the Error information.

LCP No.
1 = FMP (File Processor)
3 = DMP (Scan/Display Processor)
*6)
Task mane associated with the Error.
*7)
Address that generated the Error.
61
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-1
2242063
INTRODUCTION (continued)
Message No. Groups

000 099 . . . . Common Errors (TRAP Error, common function, etc.)
100 199 . . . . Scan
200 299 . . . . Reconstruction
300 399 . . . . Display
400 499 . . . . Image File Management
500 599 . . . . Communication (Network)
600 699 . . . . Multiformat Camera
700 799 . . . . (reserved)
800 899 . . . . (same as Message 000 099)
900 999 . . . . Utility
Format for Message Lists

The following format is used to list message and error message lists in Sections
*1
ER001
*2
System Error
*3
*4
*1)
Classification of Error/Message and Message No.
*2)
Caption Message
*3)
Data (40 characters of upper line and 16 characters of lower line are considered as continuous.)
*4)
Description
62
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2
6-2-1
2242063
MESSAGE LIST
Message List
MS000
Abort Button on
Abort Button has been pressed.

MS001
Start Timeout
Scan Start Timeout (Didnt press the [Start] button in time)

MS002
Insert KEYFD
<Key> floppy diskette is not inserted (Can not proceed to Maintenance program).
MS003
XRay Over Range Detect
XRay Data (DAS Data) overrange.

MS004
FPU Busy
FPU is busy.
MS005
Tube Warm up End
Tube Warm up Routine has completed.

MS006
Tube Warm up Canceled
Tube Warm up routine was canceled.
63
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-1
2242063
Message List (continued)
MS007
Reconstructions Queue Full
Number of Queue request for priority Recon is full.

MS008
Recon Completion
XXXXX.XX.XX:XX
D Reconstruction Completed (Informs when Auto Display mode is not selected).
D XXXXX.XX.XX:XX : Shows Image I.D
MS009
Calibration End
Calibration Program has completed.

MS010
Calibration Canceled
Calibration routine was canceled.

MS011
Warm up Scan Set Timeout
Scan set wait for Warm up Scan Timeou (Didnt push [Scan Set] in time).
MS060
Display Busy
The requested program is canceled because Display is in use.

MS061
OnLine CBF
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
This is the message displayed while performing inhalation or transferring data of OnLine CBF.
64
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-1
2242063
MS070
Image Data Full (Delete & Reset)
Reconstructed Data can not be store in Disk, for Disk is full of Image Data.
Countermeasure: Delete of Archive Image Data, and then pull Rest SW.
MS071
Image inf. Full in Study

Study No. = XXXXX (Delete & Reset)
Reconstruction is impossible because Image Inf. of study is full.
Countermeasure: Delete unnecessary image data in study XXXXX and then pull Reset SW.
MS072
Next Scan Preparation Time Out

Just a moment (Max.= 30 sec)
In Dynamic Scan, Scan is not completed within specified delay time.
Countermeasure: Proceed to Scan with no special operation. Push [Abort] button to stop scanning.
MS073
Pleas delete images in Disk!

Image space in disk is less than 100 images. We recommend you to delete images before scan.
(Vacant Images: xxx)(Recon Queue: yyy) = xx
The current number of vacant images (available space for new images) is less than 100. This message
appears when the [New Patient] key is pressed, if a number of vacant images (number in recon queue)
is less than 100.
65
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-1
2242063
MS080
Communication Port On Line
When the system is connected to the network using the YMS Link, this message indicates that the system can be communicated to others. When the Ethernet Link is used, it indicates only that the power
switch has been turned ON.
MS081
Communication Port OFF Line
The Communication between the systems has been disconnected.

MS082
Not Ready to Receive
Images can not be automatically transferred with the communication port Online.
MS083
Disconnected in Receiving Data
Communication is disconnected while receiving data.

MS084
Duplicate Image
When the image is received, the image with the same image ID has been registered.
MS085
Mismatched Data Patient
When the DCX contains the optional PDB (Patient Data Base), the image of MDP has been received.
MS086
Study not Found
The designated Study can not be found.
66
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-1
2242063
MS087
Already Registered Image
The received image has already been registered on the optional PDB of the DCX.
MS088
AutoTrans Target
The image that will be automatically transferred.

MS089
New Station Registered
A new station has been registered.
67
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-2-1
2242063
MS090
Auto DEL: Insufficient Send Image
When the images is automatically transferred, the Auto delete function has been worked; however, sufficient space for the image can not have been obtained.
MS091
Received Image
Images have been received.

MS092
Refused Receiving Image
Receiving images have been refused.

MS093
Warning Unexpected Study Inf.
Incorrect study information.

MS094
Warning Unexpected Image Inf.
Incorrect image information.

MS099
On Dynamic Scan
The current function stops for Dynamic Scan.

The function restarts after Dynamic Scan completes.
68
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
Error Message List
ER001
System Error
YYXXXXXX
System failure
Error of Directive/System Subroutine etc.
YYXXXXXX:
System Error Code
Section 6-3-1 For Error Message ER001 (YY=08, 10, 18, 20, 58)
INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code
Section 6-3-2 (YY=80, 88)
DMA Error Code
Section 6-3-3 (YY=28)
DISPLAY Error Code
Section 6-3-5 (YY=30, 38, 40, 90, 98)
(Refer to Section 6-3, Error Code List, about these Error Codes.)
ER002
Undefined Event Received

XXXXXXXX
There was a failure in the Event Data (Communication message).
XXXXXXXX:
The head 4 bytes of Event Data
(This error is a software problem indicator used by design engineering.)

ER003
Abnormal Termination Detected

XXXXXXXX AAAA
Task was terminated abnormally.
XXXXXXXX
Refer to Section 6-3-1, For Error message ER003 & 004

AAAA: Task name which was aborted.
69
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
Error Message List (continued)
ER004
Task Termination
BY BBBB XXXXXXXX
TN = AAAA CODE = YY
EDSP detected the termination of Task. This output occurs during normal or abnormal operation because the software is written that way.
AAAA: Task name which terminated.
BBBB: Task name which terminated Task AAAA.
XXXXXXXX
Refer to Section 6-3-1, For Error message ER003 & 004

Note
The format of TN CODE is different from other formats.
YY:
01:
02:
Normal Termination (In case of normal termination, there is another error message).
Abnormal Termination
EDSP: Error Display Task Name.

ER099
TREND Task Error

XXXXXXXX
This Error occurred when the Error Message was about to register to Disk at TREND Task. (If the Error
function is called by its normal Error No., the Error could make a permanent loop and bypass the normal
path from EDSP to TREND.)
ER100
XXXXXXXX:
Return Code (This code is used by design engineering.)
TREND:
Trend File of Message
Aperture Error
X
Error Code X =
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
Aperture Receive Command Error

Aperture 1mm Positioning Error
Gantry is not in System Mode
610
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER101
Axial Scan Error

X
Error Code X =
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
ER102
Axial Scan Request Command Error

Offset Data Gathering Timeout (1sec)
Gantry Limit Switch or Cable Check Switch is actuated.
(Gantry Azimuth Limit is detected or Cable Takeup error is detected.)
Servo Amp. Alarm is detected.
Gantry is not in System Mode.
Gantry Rotation Not Responding
Gantry Rotation Over Speed (More than 120% speed)
Aperture Positioning Error
Table Positioning Error
Azimuth Rotation Back Up Timer Error
Gantry Not at Rest Position
Not used
Not used
Gantry Position Error (2 internal from the rest position)
Gantry Speed Error (Less than 50% speed)
Gantry Error
X
Error Code X =
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
Gantry Request Command Error

Gantry Positioning Timeout (20 seconds)
Gantry Limit Switch or Cable Check Switch is Actuated.
(Gantry Azimuth Limit is detected or Cable TakeUp Error is detected.)
Servo Amp. Alarm is detected
Gantry Rotation Not Response
Gantry rotation Over Speed
611
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER103
Stationary Scan Error

X
Error Code X =
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
ER104
Stationary Scan Request Command Error

Offset Data Gathering Timeout (1sec)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Aperture Positioning Error
Table Positioning Error
Azimuth Rotation Back Up Timer Error (105%)
Gantry Not at Rest Position
Manual Gantry Error

X
Error Code X =
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
Not used
Gantry Positioning Timeout (20 seconds)
Gantry Limit Switch or Cable Check Switch is Actuated.
(Gantry Azimuth Limit is detected or Cable TakeUp Error is detected)
Servo Amp. Alarm is detected.
Gantry Rotation Not Response
Gantry Rotation Over Speed
612
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER105
Gantry Elec. Communication Error

X
Error Code X =
1:
2:
3:
Non Acknowledged Response (3 times)

Response Time out (No Response within 1 second)
Data Sum check Error
Note
Communication data between TGP and Scan Processor.
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
ER106
Receive Command Data Error

(Error Codes 5 to B show serial Data communications Errors)
Framing Error
Over Run Error
Parity Error
Framing Error and Over Run Error
Over Run and Parity Error
Framing error and Parity Error
Framing, Over Run and Parity Error
Tilt Error
X
Error Code X =
1:
ER107
Out of Tilt Range Tilt Request from OC is out of Range
Scout Scan Error

X
Error Code X =
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
Cradle Positioning Command is out of Range

Cradle Unlatch
Cradle Slip Error
Cradle Stop Error
Offset Data Gathering Timeout (2 seconds)
Not used
Not used
Cradle Moving Timeout
Gantry Illegal Rotation during scout Scan
Scout Scan Back up timer Error (105% of Normal Time)
613
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER108
Manual Cradle Error
(No Error code)

ER109
Cradle Mode Error

X
Error Code X =
1:
2:
3:
4:
ER110
Cradle Positioning command from OC is out of Range

Cradle Unlatch
Cradle Slip Error
Cradle stop Error
Manual Table Error
(No Error code)

ER111
Table Elec. Communication Error

X
Error Code X =
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
Non Acknowledged Response (3 times)

Response Timeout (No response with in 1 second)
Data SUM Check Error
Receive Command Data Error
Framing Error
Over Run Error
Parity Error
Framing error and Over Run Error

Serial data Communication Error
Over Run and Parity Error
Framing Error and Parity Error
Framing, Over Run, and Parity Error
614
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER112
XG Communication Error
XX
Error Code X =
1:
2:
4:
8:
ER113
Hard Error (Parity error, Framing error, or Over Run error)

Sum Check Error
Response Timeout
Non Acknowledge Response (3 times)
XG Error
LED STATUS = uvwxyz, %%%KV, %%%MA, HV TIME=%%%%%msec
NV TIME:
Time between HV ON and XG FAIL
LED STATUS=uvwxyz: This hexadecimal code shows the LED status (D23 D39) on the Power Cont
Assy into the X0Ray Generator as shown:
u: 0 3
v: 0 F
w: 0 3
x: 0 F
y: 0
z: 1 7
ER114
0
0
D23
D24
D23: Over voltage P4
D24: Over voltage N4
D25
D26
D27
D26
D25: Over Voltage P1
D26: Over Voltage N1
D27: Down Voltage P4
D28: Down Voltage N4
0
0
D29
D30
D29: Over Load P
D30: Over Load N
D31
D32
D33
D34
D31: Over Heat
D32: Rotor Over Current
D33: Filament Over Current
D34: Power Fail
D35
D36
D37
D38
1: HV ON Over time (more than 14.67sec below 100mA)
2: HV ON Over time (more than 5.64sec above 100mA)
3: FIL3 SW does not match soft SW.
4: Can not select 80 or 140 kV for soft SW.
5: RAM over error
6: RAM set error
7: RAM clear error
Cradle is not latched
Cradle Unlatch
615
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER115
TGE Response Timeout

XX
Error Code XX =
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
ER116
TGE ready wait Timeout

TGE new patient wait Timeout
TGE H/F first wait Timeout
TGE bui (Scan Position) wait Timeout
TGE scout/axial wait Timeout
TGE scan set wait Timeout
TGE scan end wait Timeout
TGE scan cradle stop wait Timeout
TGE cradle stop wait Timeout
TGE warm up wait Timeout
TGE offline wait Timeout
TGE cradle stop wait Timeout
TGE move gantry wait Timeout
TGE offline scan wait Timeout
XG Response Timeout
X
Error Code X =
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
ER117
XG Rotor on wait Timeout

XG HV on wait Timeout
XG HV OFF wait Timeout
XG Abort (Rotor OFF) wait Timeout
XG Rotor OFF wait Timeout
XG Next Scan Set OK wait Timeout
XG Fail
X
XG Fail
No Error Code
See LED status of Power Cont Assy.
616
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER118
SCNCTL Sequence Error

X
(Scan Control Sequence Error)
If Error Address is :
ER119
0XXXXXXX:
HV ON/OFF Sequence Error

Scan End status is received before receiving HV ON/OFF status during scan.
4XXXXXXX:
Sequence Error of Sequential Scan
8XXXXXXX:
Scan Sequence Error generated by Scan Task Program
Study No. Error
(No Error Code)

The study No. is not the ASCII numeric data.
The memory might be faulty, or some program might have destroyed the data. Inspect the memory
(Common memory) by the diagnostic program. If the memory is found to be normal, replace the system
software.
ER120
Cooling Wait Too Long
(No Error Code)

The cooling wait time has elapsed for a longer time than the specified one. (when offline scans are
performed)
Retry the scan with the less heavy scan technique, or retry the scan after some time (pretty long) has
passed.
ER121
Next Scan Preparation Timeout
(No Error Code)

Scan task response timeout error.
ER122
XRay Zero Detect
(No Error Code)

Zero data is detected. Check for the detector using support function.
617
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER130
Comm. Write Reg. Ans. Net. Wait
(No Error Code)

Received the WRITE REGISTER ANSWER INTERRUPT back, without having requested it.
ER131
Comm. Receive Buffer Over

X
(No Error Code)
Communication Receive Buffer over flow
ER132
Comm. Transmit Buffer Over
(No Error Code)

Communication Transmit Buffer over flow
ER133
Comm. Writ Reg. Ans. Timeout
(No Error Code)

Communication Write Register Answer Timeout Error.
618
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER135
PNLCTL Sequence Error

XXXXX XXX XXX
XXXXX
Show Error Code
XXX XXX
Show Wait Code
(Not used)
Note
PNLCTL: PANEL CONTROL
Error Code =
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
16:
17:
18:
19:
ER140
System ready Sequence Error

Hew patient OK/NG Sequence Error
H/F First OK/NG Sequence Error
Scan Position OK/NG Sequence Error
Scout/Axial NG Sequence Error
Scan OK Sequence Error
Scan NG Sequence Error
Scan Set OK/NG Sequence Error
Start NG Sequence Error
Next Scan OK Sequence Error
Scan and Sequence Error
Scan Sequence Error
Scan/Axial Fon req. Sequence Error (FOn req.: Push Button Flashing Request)
Online Request Sequence Error
OFFline Scan reg. Sequence Error
Warm up and Sequence Error
Scan abort enable OK sequence Error
Anode Temperatures Over

XXXX.XX
XXXX.XX:
Shows Anode Temperature (Computer simulated Value) in floating point data.
Tube Anode Temperature (Software Calculated) reached to excess value.

Note
To exit this error, retry scan sequence (Need time).
ER141
Case Temperature Over

XX.XXX
XX.XXX:
Shows Case Temperature (Computer simulated Value) in floating point data.
Tube Case Temperature (Software Calculated) reached to excess value.

Note
To exit this error, retry scan sequence (Need time).
619
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER151
Scan Timeout
XXXXXX
XXXXXX:
Shows DAS DATA DMA Count in Decimal

(Shows Number of Collected data including offset data)
Shortage of DAS DATA

ER152
Warm up Error
XXXX
XXXX
REF
SD
RATE
HPF
:Shows kind of Error

:Count Error
:Standard Deviation Error
:Rate Error
:High Frequency Component Error
D REF
9000 (Mean value of REF ch.122, 2344 with offset correction) 50000
D HPF
Previous Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)
Current Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize) 0.01 (1%)
D RATE
Previous Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)
Current Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize) 0.01 (10%)
D S.D.
S.D (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)
Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)
ER153
0.02 (2%)
Initialize Air Data Error

Please check and clean up Gantry aperture.
Raw Data check error when initializing air data.
620
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER160
Event Sequence Error
Error in Event Sequence of Up data, OK/NO Good, etc. by OffLine End Demand or Soft Key.
ER201
Recon Timeout
PPPPP.SS.AA:II
PPPPP.SS.AA:II
ER202
Shows Image ID Number Reconstruction Timeout
Invalid Parameter
SSSSSSSS
SSSSSSSS:
Shows invalid parameter for Reconstruction
This error shows that conversion error occurs during conversation between Operator and CPU.
Suspect hardware.
ER400
Duplicate Study ID Deleted

STDPTR MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
There were duplicate STUDY IDs in a STUDY POINTER area, therefore the latter study is deleted.
If the error occurred due to operation error, the operation can be continued. Otherwise it is probably a
software bug.
ER401
No study Inf. ID Deleted

The designated STUDY POINTER is deleted because there is no STUDY INF. corresponding to the
STUDY POINTER.
software bug.
ER402
Illegal Study Eye Catcher

The designated STUDY POINTER is deleted because EYE CATCHER of STUDY INF. differs.
software bug.
621
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER403
Illegal Study ID Deleted

STDPINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
STUDY ID of STUDY INF which is chained from STUDY POINTER was different from the STUDY
POINTER contents, therefor, STUDY POINTER deleted.
software bug.
ER404
Study in Old Area Deleted

STDINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
There was a STUDY POINTER which was chained to new STUDY INF in the old area, the designated
STUDY POINTER was deleted.
software bug.
ER405
Old Study Inf. study Deleted

There was a STUDY POINTER which was chained to old STUDY INF in the new area, therefore the
designated STUDY POINTER was deleted.
software bug.
ER406
Same Area Inf. Study Deleted

STUDY POINTER which had same area was found in STUDY INF., therefor, the designated STUDY
POINTER was deleted.
software bug.
ER407
No Buffer for Image Inf.

Buffer to read IMGINF is not found.
software bug.
622
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER408
Image Inf. Size Over

IMGINF which should be read in Buffer is over the Buffer size.
software bug.
ER409
Illegal Image Inf Eye Catcher

EYE CATCHER of IMGINF differs, therefor the designated IMGINF was deleted.
Note
To resolve this error, repeat the system reset until this error does not occur.
ER410
Illegal Study No Image Deleted

IMGINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
IMGINF SERNO = XX ACQNO = XX IMGNO = XX
STUDY NOs between STUDY INF and IMAGE INF differ, therefor the designated IMGINF was deleted.
ER411
Duplicate Image Inf Deleted

The Duplicate IMAGE IDs are found in IMGINF, therefore the latter was deleted.
software bug.
ER412
No Image Data Image Inf Deleted

IMAGE DATA is not found, therefore, IMGINF wad deleted.
software bug.
623
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER413
Illegal Study ID Image Deleted

IMGPTR MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
IMGPTR SERNO = XX ACQNO = XX IMGNO = XX
IMGINF was deleted because it is different in STUDY ID of IMAGE POINTER.
Note
To resolve this error, repeat the system reset until this error does not occur.
ER414
Illegal Study ID image Deleted

IMGINF deleted so that it is different IMAGE ID OF IMAGE POINTER.
software bug.
ER415
Same Area Image Inf. Deleted

Same AREA is used in IMAGE DATA, therefore, the later IMGINF was deleted.
software bug.
ER416
Image Data Area Size Over

The required IMAGE DATA area is larger than the available area.
software bug.
ER417
Duplicate Image Pointer Deleted

IMGINF which is means same area was found, therefore, the latter IMGINF was deleted.
software bug.
624
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER418
Image Pointer Area Size Over

The required IMAGE POINTER area is larger than the available area.
If the error occurred due to operation error, the operation can be continued.
ER419
Same Area Image Inf Deleted

Two IMGINF were found in the same area, therefor, the latter was deleted.
ER420
Image Inf Area Size Over

The required IMGINF area is larger than the available area.
ER421
No Image Inf Study Inf Deleted

STDINF which does not have IMGINF wad found, therefor, the designated STDINF was deleted.
software bug.
ER422
Study Inf area Size Over

The required STDINF are is larger than the available area. Suspect that disk is full.
625
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER431
Event Sequence Error

XXXXXXXX
YY
The Event was received with illegal timing as the status of IMAGE FILE MANAGEMENT.
ER432
XXXXXXXX
: The top 4 Bytes of Event.
YY
: SEQUENCE
00
01
02
03
04
05
Wait status for start from DIMCTL

Wait status for FD CHECK
Wait status for FD FORMAT
Wait status for MT CHECK
Wait status for MT FORMAT
Wait status for temporary halt response
Logical Error
Logic Error occurred as the status of IMAGE FILE MANAGEMENT.

ER433
Image Already Stored

ID = XX:XXXXX.XX.XX:XX
This image already stored on MT, FD, or OD (Discovered while trying to store this image)
ER434
Image Already Exist

This image already exists. (Discovered while trying to retrieve this image)
ER435
Image Not Found

Couldnt find this image during sore or retrieve to requested Disk or Device.
ER436
Image in Scan study, No Load

Cannot retrieve this Image Study # because the current scanning Study has the same number.
626
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-2-2
2242063
ER437
OD Study Incorrect, No Store

Either only Study Inf. or only Image Inf. exists in the Study when storing to OD. So, impossible to store.
Countermeasure:
ER440
Perform OD sweeper in Maintenance Program.
OD Study Inf Nothing

MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
Image inf. file of the study exists, but the OD cannot find corresponding Image data, so it cannot retrieve
the data.
Countermeasure:
ER441
OD Image Inf. Nothing

The Study exists in OD, but the Image Inf. File of the Study does not exist in OD. So, impossible to access the Study.
Countermeasure:
ER442
OD study Inf. Incorrect

NO. OF IMAGES IN STUDY INF = XXX
NO. OF IMAGES IN IMAGE INF. FILE = XXX
The Number of Images in Study Inf. differs from the actual number of Inf. in Image Inf. File in OD. Ti
is possible to display, but impossible to write.
Countermeasure:
ER443
OD Study Inf. Nothing Deleted

Image inf. file for the study exists, but the OD cannot find the corresponding image data: therefore the
designated Image Inf. file was deleted.
ER500
Inhalator Not Ready
Inhalator Ready Timeout
627
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3
2242063
ERROR CODE LIST
Format for Error Code

X X Y Y Z Z
XX:
YY:
ZZ:
00001000:
01011000:
00010000:
00011000:
00101000:
10000000:
10001000:
DIRECTIVE ERROR
DIRECTIVE ERROR
IOS ERROR
FHS ERROR
DMA ERROR
INFCTL ERROR
IMGCTL ERROR
Request Directive Number

Terget CPU Number
01 or 03:CPU
Error Code
08XXYYZZ
58XXYYZZ
100000ZZ
180000ZZ
280000ZZ
800000ZZ
880000ZZ
Refer to System Error Code

Refer to DMA Error Code
628
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-3-1
2242063
System Error Code and Abort Code
For Error Message ER001

SYSTEM ERROR CODE (GENERATED BY OC)
D 08XX00ZZ
08010003
08010005
08010006
08010008
0801000A
0801000B
08020003
08020007
0802000A
08040005
08040006
08040007
0804000B
08060003
08060007
08060009
0806000B
08090003
080B0006
080B0008
080D0003
080D0023
080D000A
08100003
08100023
08100006
08100009
08170003
08170023
0817000A
08190003
08190023
08190006
08190009
083A0001
083A0002
083A0003
083A0008
083A0009
083AFF81
083AFF82
NONEXISTENT TARGET TASK

SEGMENT TABLE FULL
DUPLICATE SEGMENT NAME
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
NONDORMANT TARGET TASK
LOGICAL ADDRESS CONFLICT
NONEXISTENT TARGET TASK
NONEXISTENT SEGMENT NAME
NONDORMANT TARGET TASK
SEGMENT TABLE FULL
DUPLICATE SEGMENT NAME
NONEXISTENT SEGMENT NAME
LOGICAL ADDRESS CONFLICT
SOURCE TASK NOT FOUND
DESTINATION TASK NOT FOUND
USER TO SYSTEM TASK NOT ALLOWED
ADDRESSES DIFFERENT EVEN/ODD BOUNDARY
TARGET TASK NOT FOUND
DUPLICATE TASK NAME
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
TASK DOES NOT EXIST
TASK DOES NOT EXIST
TASK NOT DORMANT
TARGET TASK DOES NOT EXIST
TARGET TASK ALREADY IN TERMINATION
USER TASK CAN NOT TERMINATE SYSTEM TASK OR SELF
TASK IS TERMINATING
TARGET TASK ALREADY STOPPED
USER TASK CAN NOT STOP SYSTEM TASK
UNDEFINED XI/O
UNIMPLEMENTED I/O
TASK NOTEXISTED
UNDEFINED I/O
MULTIPLE ASSIGN
CLOSE ERROR
ALLOCATE ERROR
629
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-3-1
2242063
System Error Code and Abort Code (continued)

SYSTEM ERROR CODE (GENERATED BY OS)
D 100000ZZ
1000000C
10000020
10000021
10000022
10000082
10000083
10000084
10000085
10000086
10000087
100000C1
100000C2
100000C3
100000C4
100000C5
100000C6
100000C7
100000C8
100000C9
100000CA
100000CB
100000CC
100000CD
100000D1
100000D2
100000D3
100000E1
100000E2
100000E3
100000E4
100000E5
100000E6
100000E7
100000E8
100000E9
100000EA
100000EB
100000EC
100000ED
100000EE
100000EF
INSUFFICIENT SYSTEM SPACE

CFMS CPU TIME OUT
CFMS CPU FAIL
CFMS LU SPACE FULL
INVALID FUNCTION
INVALID LOGICAL UNIT
INVALID DATA BUFFER
INVALID RANDOM RECORD
INVALID PARAM BLOCK ADDRESS
PROTECT CODE ERROR
BUFFER OVERFLOW
END OF FILE
END OF VOLUME
INVALID OR EMPTY FAB
INVALID TRANSFER FOR DEVICE
BREAK CONDITION
INTERNAL IO ERROR
FAB/DATA BLOCK CONFLICT
RECORD DOES NOT EXIST
RECORD ALREADY EXISTS
RECORD OVERFLOW/TOO MANY RECORDS IN DATA BLOCK
KEY ERROR, FAB KEY CONFLICT
DISK SPACE FULL
UNRECOVERABLE DEVICE ERROR
DATA COMPARE ERROR
SECTOR PROTECT ERROR
DEVICE NOT READY
DEVICE BUSY
DATA CRC ERROR
WRITE PROTECTED DEVICE
DELETED DATA MARK DETECTED
TIMEOUT
INVALID SECTOR ADDRESS
CHECKSUM ERROR
DISK RESTORE ERROR
DATA OVERRUN
DEVICE STATUS CHANGED
TRACK/SECTOR ID NOT FOUND
ADDRESS MARK CRC ERROR
SEEK ERROR
BAD SECTOR
630
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-1
2242063

D 100000ZZ (continued)
100000F1
100000F2
100000F3
100000F4
100000F5
100000F6
100000F7
100000F8
CHANNEL BUSY
CHANNEL DMA ERROR
CHANNEL UNRECOVERABLE CHANNEL ERROR
CONTROLLER ERROR
DEVICE CONFIGURATION ERROR
DMA BUS ERROR
DMA MAPPING ERROR
DMA CONTROLLER ERROR
For MT
10000088
10000091
10000092
10000093
10000094
10000095
10000096
10000097
10000098
10000099
1000009A
100000C6
100000C9
100000CD
INVALID BLOCK LENGTH

TAPE MISMATCH (800/1600BPI)
FILE NOT FOUND (MT)
REJECTED BY MT
DATA SHORT 0 (MT BLOCK READ)
LOST DATA 0
ERROR CORRECTED (MT WRITE)
I/O ERROR (MT DIRECTIVE)
I/O ERROR (MT PACKET)
INCONSISTENCY OF WRITING TYPE (MT)
FILE MARK ERROR (MT)
INTERNAL ERROR
BLOCK DOESNT EXIST
INSUFFICIENT TAPE SPACE
For OD
100000A0
100000A1
100000A2
100000A3
100000A4
100000A5
100000A7
100000A8
100000A9
100000AA
100000AB
100000AC
100000AD
100000AE
100000AF
INVALID COMMAND
PBN NOT FOUND
UNWRITTEN (READ)
DELETED
(READ)
OVER WRITE (WRITE)
ALTERNATE TRACK FULL (WRITE)
DONT SEARCH UNWRITTEN
BUS ERROR
BUS TIME OUT
DVC TIME OUT
GPIB COMMUNICATION ERROR
DISK PERMANENT ERROR (READ)
DISK PERMANENT ERROR (WRITE)
DRIVE ERROR
ODC ERROR
631
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-1
2242063

D 180000ZZ
18000002
18000003
18000004
18000005
18000006
18000007
18000008
18000009
1800000A
1800000B
1800000C
1800000D
1800000E
1800000F
18000010
18000011
18000012
18000013
18000014
18000015
18000016
18000017
18000019
1800001A
1800001B
1800001C
1800001D
18000020
18000021
18000022
180000CD
180000D1
180000D2
180000D3
INVALID COMMAND
INVALID LOGICAL UNIT
INVALID OR NONEXISTENT VOLUME
DUPLICATE FILE NAME
FILE DESCRIPTOR ERROR
PROTECT CODE ERROR
RECORD LENGTH ERROR
SHARED SEGMENT ERROR
INSUFFICIENT DIRECTORY SPACE
ACCESS PERMISSION ERROR
INSUFFICIENT SYSTEM SPACE
ASSIGNMENT ERROR
INVALID DEVICE DEVICE TYPE
BUFFER OVERFLOW
INVALID TASK NAME
INVALID BUFFER ADDRESS
INVALID FILE TYPE
INTERNAL FHS ERROR
INVALID PARAM BLOCK ADDRESS
DATA BLOCK LENGTH ERROR
SIZE ERROR
NONEXISTENT FILE NAME
KEY LENGTH ERROR
FAB LENGTH ERROR
DEFAULT VOLUME NOT DEFINED
INVALID STATE FOR COMMAND
USER NOT OWNER OR ADMINISTRATOR
CFMS CPU TIME OUT
CFMS CPU FAIL
CFMS LU SPACE FULL
DISK SPACE FULL
UNRECOVERABLE DEVICE ERROR
DATA COMPARE ERROR
SECTOR PROTECT ERROR
632
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-1
2242063

D 180000ZZ (continued)
180000E1
180000E2
180000E3
180000E4
180000E5
180000E6
180000E7
180000E8
180000E9
180000EA
180000EB
180000EC
180000ED
180000EE
180000EF
180000F1
180000F2
180000F3
180000F4
180000F5
180000F6
180000F7
180000F8
DEVICE NOT READY

DEVICE BUSY
DATA CRC ERROR
WRITE PROTECTED DEVICE
DELETED DATA MARK DETECTED
TIMEOUT
INVALID SECTOR ADDRESS
CHECKSUM ERROR
DISK RESTORE ERROR
DATA OVERRUN
DEVICE STATUS CHANGED
TRACK/SECTOR ID NOT FOUND
ADDRESS MARK CRC ERROR
SEEK ERROR
BAD SECTOR
CHANNEL BUSY
CHANNEL DMA ERROR
UNRECOVERABLE CHANNEL ERROR
CONTROLLER ERROR
DEVICE CONFIGURATION ERROR
DMA BUS ERROR
DMA MAPPING ERROR
DMA CONTROLLER ERROR
D 200000ZZ
20000001
20000012
20000013
UNDEFINED DIRECTIVE
OUT OF SEGMENT AREA
FILE IS NOT A LOAD FILE
D 58XXYYZZ
5814YY30
5814YY31
5823YY30
5823YY31
YY:
TARGET CPU HALT

TARGET CPU NONEXISTENT
TARGET CPU HALT
TARGET CPU NONEXISTENT
(FILE PROCESSOR)
LOGICAL CPU NO. 01 or 03: CPW
633
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-1
2242063

Note
Normally though an error codes are displayed in eight digits, the error codes occurred y the Ethernet
network are often in four digits. Note that the dummy code of 0000 or FFFF might be added to the
original error code blow (80XX):
D 80XX
8006
8009
8010
8011
8012
8013
8014
8015
8016
8017
8018
8040
TASK STOP INSTRUCTION FROM TERMINAL

UNEXPECTED BREAK
BUS ERROR
ADDRESS ERROR
ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION
ZERO DIVIDE
CHK INSTRUCTION
TRAPV INSTRUCTION
PRIVILEGE VIOLATION
UNIMPLEMENTED INSTRUCTION (1010)
COMPULSORY STOP
D 00XXYYZZ
XX
01
02
03
04
08
10
20
80
ACK TIMEOVER
RESPONSE TIMEOVER
ACK AND RESPONSE TIMEOVER
RESPONSE SEQUENCE ERROR
RESET REQUEST
BUS/ADDRESS ERROR IN COMMAND LIST
RETRY OVER
DEVICE ERROR
YYZZ
0802
1002
2001
2002
4001
4002
4021
4041
8001
8002
8021
8041
FPORT TIMEOUT
BUS ERROR
NO LUTB
MAPPING ERROR
COMMAND IN RUN
VBUS TIMEOUT
COMMAND IN RUN
COMMAND IN RUN
INVALID COMMAND
INVALID COMMAND
INVALID COMMAND
INVALID COMMAND
634
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-1
2242063
For Error Message ER003, ER004

TERMINATION CODE (GENERATED BY EXEC)
D XXXX
8010
8011
8012
8013
8014
8015
8016
8017
8018
BUS ERROR
ADDRESS ERROR
ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION
ZERO DIVIDE
CHK INSTRUCTION
TRAP INSTRUCTION
PRIVILEGE INSTRUCTION
635
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-2
2242063
INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code
D Code (ZZ)
A1
Error of GETADC or GETADA
A2
The number of arrangements of STUDY INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEM
CONSTANT. (DISK)
A3
The number of arrangements of IMAGE INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEM
CONSTANT.
A4
The number of arrangements of IMAGE INFORMATION is 0.
A5
The number of IMAGE DATA FILE BLOCK is lass that the number in SYSTEM WORK.
A6
IMAGE INFORMATION BUFFER is smaller than all IMAGE INFORMATION SIZE in

1 STUDY.
A7
The number of arrangements of STUDY INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEM
CONSTANT. (OD)
Table 61
INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code Allocate
Code (ZZ)
Description
00
The designated Study was already registered.
01
The designated Study does not exist.
02
The designated Image was already registered.
03
Image No. Deciding Error.
04
Study Area full./ OD Study INF file full.
05
Image INF Block full./OD Image INF file full.
06
The Area in Image File full./OD Image INF file full during allocation.
07
Image File full./OD Image INF file full during allocation.
08
There is no space in Image INF BUFFER.
09
The size of Image INF is too big.
0A
Study INF Initial Value Error.
0B
Image INF Initial Value Error.
0C
The designated Image doesnt exist.
0D
Number Full (SER, ACQ IMG)
0E
N/A
0F
N/A
10
OD Off line
11
OD Protected
12
Impossible to Allocate for Illegal Form of STUDY, IMAGE INF.
636
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-2
2242063
INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code (continued)

Table 62
INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code Delete
Code (ZZ)
Description
20
The designated Study does not exist.
21
There is no specified Study. It is not deleted.
22
There was not enough in the specified Study.
23
There is no specified Image. Ti is not deleted.
24
There was not enough in specified Image.
25
26
The reading size of Image INF is too big.
27
N/A
28
Impossible to delete for all of the appointed study are protected from Delete.
29
Impossible to delete for some of the appointed study are protected from Delete.
2A
Impossible to delete for the study of the appointed Image is protected from delete
2B
N/A
2C
N/A
2D
N/A
2E
N/A
2F
N/A
30
OD Off line
31
OD Protected
32
Impossible to delete for Illegal From of OD STUDY, IMAGE INF.
637
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-2
2242063

Table 63
INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code GET/PUT
Code (ZZ)
Description
40
There is no designated Study.
41
There is no pertinent Image.
42
43
The reading size of Image INF is too big.
44
Access is out of Image Area.
45
N/A
46
N/A
47
N/A
48
N/A
49
N/A
4A
N/A
4B
N/A
4C
N/A
4D
N/A
4E
N/A
4F
N/A
50
OD Off line
51
OD Protected
52
Impossible to read/write for Illegal Form of OD STUDY, IMAGE INF.
638
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-2
2242063

Table 64
INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code Parameter Error
Code (ZZ)
Description
C0
Function No. Error
C1
Station No. Error (It is impossible to change to Mode/Machine No.)
C2
Study No. Error (except for the numeric data)
C3
Series No. error (except for the numeric data)
C4
ACQ No. Error (except for the numeric data)
C5
IMG No. error (except for the numeric data)
C6
There is no STD in STD INF which is ready.
C7
There is no IMG in IMG INF which is ready.
C8
The number of Image INF Block is except for 1 or 2.
C9
The number of Image INF Block is less than 0.
CA
The number of List is less than 0.
CB
Completion Type Error.
CC
Flag Error (Mode etc.)
CD
It is not Old in spite of the other machine.
CE
Search Mode is 0 and Mode/Machine No. is 1.
CF
Image size is 0.
639
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-2
2242063

Table 65
INFCTL/IMGCTL Logic Error of INFCTL/IMGCTL
Code (ZZ)
Description
E0
Event Code Error
E1
Sub Code Error
E2
This was already registered during Study INF Allocate.
E3
This was already registered during Allocate in Image INF File.
E4
N/A
E5
LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Study Pointer Delete.
E6
LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Study INF Delete.
E7
LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Image INF Delete.
E8
SCBITOPR Error during Study INF Delete.
E9
SCBITOPR Error during Delete in Image INF File.
EA
SCBITOPR Error during Image PRT/File Delete.
EB
The area in Image INF File full.
EC
This was already registered during Image INF Allocate.
ED
Scan or Load is different from the position in File during Image INF Allocate.
EE
N/A
EF
N/A
640
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-3
2242063
Display Error Code

980000XX
:User/Prime Display Function
30YY00XX
:PLNCTL
38YY00XX
:KBDRV
40YY00XX
:DPDRV
1000000XX
:Connected with WTTY
jjYY00XX
:Basic Graphic
641
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-3
2242063
Display Error Code (continued)
Table 66
Display Error Code
XX
Description
50
Directive No. Error
51
ODD parameter Address
Task Name
52
53
Invalid Request
54
55
56
Invalid Parameter
(W/L Control)
57
Invalid Parameter
(Frame Setting)
58
Invalid Parameter
(Frame Data)
59
Invalid Parameter
(W/L)
5A
Invalid Parameter
(Identify)
5B
Invalid Parameter
()
5C
Invalid Parameter
(Image Display)
5D
Invalid Parameter
(Image Data Read)
5E
Invalid Parameter
(Paging)
5F
Invalid Parameter
(Interrupted Image)
60
Invalid Parameter
(Interrupted FPU)
DPDRV
(40YY00XX)
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
Time Out (Image display)
69
Time Out (Graphic Cursor)
6A
Time Out (W/L Processing)
6B
Time Out (Interrupted Image)
6C
Time Out (Interrupted FPU)
6D
6E
6F
Graphic Sequence Error

(Continued)
642
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-3
2242063
Table 66
XX
Description
70
Directive No. Error
71
ODD Parameter Address
72
Device No. Error
Task Name
73
74
75
76
Invalid Parameter
(Erase Processing)
77
Invalid Parameter
(Graphic DMA)
78
Invalid Parameter
(Screen Save)
79
Invalid Parameter
(Overlay Display)
7A
Invalid Parameter
(Graphic Cursor)
7B
Invalid Parameter
(Report Cursor)
7C
Invalid Parameter
(LED/Buzzer)
7D
7E
7F
PLNCTL
(30YY00XX)
80
Time Out (Erase Processing)
81
Time Out (Graphic DMA)
82
Time Out (Screen Saveoverlay)
83
Time Out (Screen Saveimage)
84
Time Out (Graphic Cursor)
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
ACRTC Command Error
8F
Graphic Sequence Error

(Continued)
643
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-3
2242063
Table 66
XX
Description
90
Directive No. Error
91
Invalid Parameter Block Address
92
Invalid Parameter
93
Invalid Request
94
Can not requested Command
95
Invalid No. of characters
Task Name
96
97
98
Key Board not allocated
99
Channel Busy
9A
Response Time Out
KBDRY
(38YY00XX)
9B
9C
Hardware Error
9D
Hardware Error
9E
Hardware Error
9F
Hardware Error
A0
A1
Invalid Parameter
A2
Not Defined Area
A3
Duplicate Define
A4
Value Not Defined
A5
Invalid Area Position
A6
Invalid Area Size
A7
User/Prime
Display Func
(980000XX)
A8
A9
AA
DCB Graphic Flag Double Assigned
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
(Continued)
644
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-3
2242063
Table 66
XX
Description
Task Name
B0
B1
B2
User/Prime
Display Func
(980000XX)
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Read Event Flag error
B8
Event Status Error
B9
Event Busy Error
BA
Not Enable Mag. Character Error
BB
Cancel Flag Error
BC
Over Split Over Error
BD
Not Split Device Error
BE
Over line error
BF
Invalid Parameter Error
C0
Write FIFO Empty Time Out Error
C1
Write FIFO Ready Time Out Error
C2
Read FIFO Ready Time Out error
C3
Read FIFO empty Time Out Error
WTTY
(100000XX)
C4
C5
Command End Time Out Error

BASIC
Graphic
(30YY00XX)
(38YY00XX)
(40YY00XX)
(98YY00XX)
C6
C7
C8
Command Error
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
ACRTC Not Ready
CE
CF
(Continued)
645
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-3
2242063
Table 66
XX
Description
Task Name
D0
D1
Configuration Error
D2
Operation Timing Error
D3
D4
Address Error
D5
D6
D7
D8
Bus Error
D9
DA
DB
DC
Count Error
DD
BASIC
Graphic
(30YY00XX)
(38YY00XX)
(40YY00XX)
(98YY00XX)
DE
DF
E0
Abort
E1
Software Abort
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
DMAC Ready Time Out Error
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
(Continued)
646
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-3
2242063

Table 66
XX
Description
F0
Time Out Error
F1
Can not Display During Horizontal Blanking
F2
Can not Refresh DRAM During Horizontal Blanking
Task Name
F3
F4
F5
BASIC
Graphic
(30YY00XX)
(38YY00XX)
(40YY00XX)
(98YY00XX)
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
Table 67
Invalid Parameter Error
Display Error Code 28YY00XX (DMADRV)
XX
Description
Task Name
00
01
Directive No. remains undecided
02
03
Invalid Direction code
04
Invalid Memory Address
05
Invalid Data Size
06
Invalid CPU Number
DMADRV
07
08
09
0A
(Continued)
647
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-3
2242063

Table 67
Display Error Code 28YY00XX (DMADRV) (continued)
XX
Description
80
Channel Busy
81
Configuration Error
82
83
Remains undecided
84
Address Error
85
Address Error
86
Address Error
87
Address Error
88
Bus Error
89
Bus Error
8A
Bus Error
8B
Bus Error
8C
Count Error
8D
Count Error
8E
Count Error
8F
Count Error
90
External Compulsory Stop
91
Software Compulsory Stop
Task Name
DMADRV
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
A0
Time Out
648
SYSTEM
REV 0
6-3-3
2242063

Table 68
Display Error Code 48YY00XX (Image Data Unpack)
XX
Description
01
Directive No. Error
02
Odd parameter Address
03
Unpack Task is Busy
04
Unpack Task is not Busy
10
Odd Information Block Address
11
Invalid parameter
20
Not Dame Task

(Different Task from Request one confirmed for completion of Unpack)
Table 69
Display Error Code 5000XXXX (Image Inf. Display)
XXXX
Description
00F0
Image Type is not Supported
00F1
Display Task is Busy
00F2
Invalid file Name
80YY
Task abort (Refer to System Error Code)
Table 610
Task Name
Task Name
Display Error Code A8000XXX (Special Error)
XXX
Description
001
Internal logic error
(IFM Display Error)
002
GETS error
(IFM Display Error)
003
Internal logic error
(IFM Display Error)
201
OD error
(OD Error)
202
Bit map oversize
(OD Error)
300
Not initialized
(OD Error)
301
Different volume name (OD Error)
302
Not initialized
(OD Error)
303
Different family name
(OD Error)
010
No station space
(INFCTL Error)
100
System sequence error (INFCTL Error)
649
Task Name
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-4
2242063
FPU (FPJOIN) Error Code
Table 611
FPJOIN Error Code
Error Code
00000000
Description
Normal Completion
08UUYYZZ
Trap 1 Error
10UUYYZZ
Trap 2 Error
18UUYYZZ
Trap 3 Error
90000001
PINT (FPU CPU Interrupt)
90000002
Reset
90000003
Invalid Parameter
90000004
Time Out
90000005
Busy (FPU Running)
90000006
Busy (FPU Initializing)
90000007
Illegal (Error Occurred in FPU)
90000008
90000009
Reset Error (can not Reset)
9000000A
9000000B
Interrupt Over (Interrupt Buffer Overflow)
9000000C
The IPU is not idling.
9000000D
9000000E
9000000F
900000FF
(Notsupported function called)
650
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-5
2242063
DMA Error Code
Table 612
DMA Error Code
Error Code
Description
00000000
Normal Completion
28XX0001
Directive No. remains undecided
28XX0002
28XX0003
Invalid direction Code
28XX0004
Invalid memory address
28XX0005
Invalid Data Size
28XX0006
Invalid CPU number
28XX0080
Channel Busy
28XX0081
Configuration Error
28XX0082
28XX0083
Reserved
28XX0084
Address Error
28XX0085
Address Error
28XX0086
Address Error
28XX0087
Address Error
28XX0088
Bus Error
28XX0089
Bus Error
28XX008A
Bus Error
28XX008B
Bus Error
28XX008C
Count Error
28XX008D
Count Error
28XX008E
Count Error
28XX008F
Count Error
28XX0090
External Compulsory Stop
28XX0091
Software Compulsory Stop
28XX00A0
Time Out
Note:
XX is Directive number.
651
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-6
2242063
RAWCTL Error Code
00000000
No Error
A0000001
I.D No. Error
A0000002
Not Valid
A0000003
Transfer Byte Error
A0000004
Sub Code Error
A0000005
Size Error
A0000006
Can not Reserve
652
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-7
2242063
Ethernet Error Code
The following error codes are displayed for systems with the ETC board.
Table 613
Ethernet OS Error Code
Code
Description
0001
Task ID error.
0002
Can not keep TCB (Task control block).
0003
Can not keep memory.
0004
Memory block does not exist.
0005
Mail box is in use.
0006
Can not send designated message.
0007
Buffer full.
0008
Abnormal waiting for character entry.
0009
Abnormal system call.
000A
Time out.
000B
Message is not received.
000C
Queue ID error.
000D
Queue full.
000E
Nonexistent designated memory partition.
000F
Fatal initialized error occurred.
0010
Character is not entered.
0011
Abnormal configuration parameter OS.
0012
Abnormal parameter when creating or expanding memory partition.
0020
Component vector is not assigned.
0021
Undecided component assigned.
0022
Undecided operation code assigned.
0030
Control block does not exist.
0031
Event flag or semaphore ID error.
0032
Task is waiting for event flag or semaphore.
0033
Event flag or semaphore deleted.
0034
Event flag or semaphore doubled.
653
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-7
2242063
Ethernet Error Code (continued)
Table 614
Ethernet Communication Control Routine Error Code

Description
Code
0A01
Abnormal owner.
0A03
Designated process does not exist.
0A06
Designated device or address does not exist.
0A0D
Abnormal access mode.
0A11
File is already existed.
0A16
Abnormal parameter.
0A18
Too many files opened.
0A20
Connection destroyed.
0A23
Designated operation blocked.
0A24
Designated operation is now run.
0A25
Designated operation is already run.
0A26
Socket operation is run.
0A27
Destination address does not exist.
0A28
Too long message.
0A29
Abnormal protocol for socket.
0A2A
Invalid designated protocol.
0A2B
Designated protocol is not supported.
0A2D
Designated operation is not supported in socket.
0A2F
Designated address family is not supported.
0A30
Designated address is busy.
0A31
Can not assign designated address.
0A32
Network is down.
0A33
Can not connect network due to abnormal AUI cable and ETC.
0A35
Software disconnects network.
0A36
Connection is reset.
0A37
No buffer space.
0A38
Designated socket is busy.
0A39
Designated socket is not connected.
0A3C
Connection time out.
0A3D
Connection rejected.
0A40
Satellite down.
0A41
No satellite connection.
(Continued)
654
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-7
2242063
Table 614
Ethernet Communication Control Routine Error Code (continued)

Description
Code
0A50
Abnormal configuration parameter.
0A51
Insufficient local memory space.
0A52
Can not keep ARP table.
0A53
designated satellite is not registered.
0A54
Abnormal internet address.
0A55
Abnormal network setting for internet address.
0A56
Insufficient global memory space.
0A57
Abnormal configuration parameter.
0A58
Faulty Lock
0A59
No CDT
0A5A
PANIC (inin_control)
0A5B
PANIC (icmpicmp_error)
0A5C
PANIC (icmplength)
0A5D
PANIC (ipinit)
0A5E
PANIC (rawuser req)
0A5F
PANIC (routefree)
0A60
PANIC (tcppull oob)
0A61
PANIC (tcpoutput)
0A62
PANIC (tcpoutput REXMT)
0A63
PANIC (tcpuser req)
0A64
PANIC (udpuser req)
0A65
PANIC (m_get)
0A66
PANIC (m_free)
0A67
PANIC (m_copy)
0A68
PANIC (m_copy)
0A69
PANIC (m_copy)
0A6A
PANIC (sofree)
0A6B
PANIC (soclose)
0A6C
PANIC (soaccept)
0A6D
PANIC (sorecv)
0A6E
PANIC (sorecv)
0A6F
PANIC (sorecv)
(Continued)
655
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-7
2242063

Table 614
Ethernet Communication Control Routine Error Code (continued)
Code
Description
0A70
PANIC (sorecv)
0A71
PANIC (soisconnected)
0A72
PANIC (sbappendrights)
0A73
PANIC (sbflush)
0A74
PANIC (sbflush)
0A75
PANIC (sbdrop)
0A76
PANIC (accept)
0A77
PANIC (arpno free entry)
656
SYSTEM

REV 0
6-3-7
2242063
The following table lists the error codes generated by the Ethernet board driver.
Format:XXYZ
XX
Y
Z
:Task ID
:Operation Code
:Error Code
XX
Task ID
F0
System Bus Driver
Memory space
Table Full
Packet transmission
Busy
Packet reception
Abnormal Pattern
CPU board
Over range
Packet switching itself
Request Doubled
Initialization
Abnormal designated Address
Transmission
Not Found
Reception
Retry counts over specifications
Initialization
failed
Transmission
Not Supported
Reception
Not Ready
Initialization of Ethernet BD
Queue transmission for task of

Ethernet BD
Mail transmission for task of Ehternet BD
Temporary stop for task of Ehernet

BD
Operation resumption for task of

Ethernet BD
Task deletion of Ethernet BD
Task load start of Ethernet BD
Next operation mode setting of

Ethernet BD
Memory access of Ethernet BD
Task load start
Memory access
F1
F2
F9
FA
FB
Ethernet Driver
Modem Driver
I/F Manager
CPU BD
I/F Manager
Ethernet BD
Program Loader
on
on
Description
Description
Remains Undecided
657
SYSTEM

blank
2242063
658
SYSTEM
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 7 IMAGE SPATIAL RESOLUTION
7-1
DESCRIPTION
MTR Survey Program

Image spatial resolution can be measured by scanning a GE Performance Phantom and analyzing the acquired image
with the MTF Survey program included in Support within the Maintenance menu.
The MTF Survey program calculates MTF data by the twodimensional Fourier Transform of the point spread function
using pixel data around the wire.
Since the program stores the result to a mean file, analyze the result using Support display, and evaluate the system
spatial resolution performance.
The following section describes the procedure for this spatial resolution evaluation using MTF Survey.
71
SYSTEM

REV 0
7-2
2242063
PROCEDURE
Special Tools/Supplies
D GE Performance Phantom (2102580)
7-2-1
Scanning the GE Performance Phantom
1.
Set the GE Performance Phantom approximately at the scan center.
2.
Touch the [New Patient] button, and then select [Neck].
3.
Select OFF for Motion Correction
4.
Adjust the position of the phantom so that the wire point within the phantom is positioned at the scan center:
a. Perform an axial scan with the following parameters:
3.6 or 4.5 sec, 120kV, 160mA (others: default)
b. Display a grid.
c. Measure the distance between the wire point and the scan center in the following way:
i.
Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair cursor.
ii.
Move the cursor using the trackball to the wire point, and then, press the [Dist Angle] key to copy the
cursor over the wire point.
iii.
Move the cursor vertically to the X Axis, and then, press [Dist Angle] again, to deposit the end location
and display the distance between the wire point and the X axis (A). See illustration 71.
iv.
Perform the above to measure the distance between the wire point and the Y axis (B).
Illustration 71
Positioning Wire Point to Scan Center

Y
Wire Point
B
A
Scan Center
72
SYSTEM

REV 0
7-2
2242063
PROCEDURE (continued)
7-2-1
Scanning the GE Performance Phantom (continued)
d. Shift the phantom so that the wire point is positioned at the scan center, according to the distances measured
at the above step.
Use the upsown adjuster and rightleft adjuster o the phantom holder (one turn: 1mm movement).
e. Repeat steps a through d, until the wire point is positioned at the scan center within 0.5mm.
If the image shows a white band over the wire point, this indicates that the wire point is not yet positioned
correctly at the scan center. See illustration 72.
Illustration 72
White Band Over Wire Point
White Band
73
SYSTEM

REV 0
7-2
7-2-1
5.
2242063
Scanning the GE Performance Phantom (continued)
Write down the wire point position in pixel:

a. Press the [Crsr] key to display the crosshair cursor on the image.
b. Using the trackball, move the cursor onto the wire point. See illustration 73.
c. Press the [Image Meas] key, and then select REPORT CURSOR.
d. Verify that X and Y locations of the cursor are indicated in cm on the upper right of the screen.
e. Press the [End] key once.
f. Press the [Image Trtmt] key, and then select SET DISPLAY.
g. Select PIXEL INDICATE.
The highlights PIXEL INDICATE, and then the X and Y locations are indicated in pixel.
h. Write down the wire point position in pixel and image number:
Wire Point Position
Image Number
6.
(in pixel)
(in pixel)
:
Proceed to Section 7-2-2.

Illustration 73
Positioning the Cursor onto Wire Point
Wire Point
74
SYSTEM
REV 0
7-2
2242063
7-2-2
MTF Survey Program
1.
Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive. (This step is not required for systems installed in Japan.)
2.
Touch the [Maint] key, and enter $$ , as follows:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
Select No.= $$ CR
3.
Select Support from the Maintenance menu.
4.
Select MTF Survey from the Support menu.
5.
For the following prompts, enter as described:

a. Enter the image ID recorded at step 5 in Section 7-2-1.
b. Enter X location of the wire in pixel, recorded at step 5 in Section 7-2-1.
c. Enter Y location of the wire in pixel, recorded at step 5 in Section 7-2-1.
d. AREA SIZE <8 / 16 / 32 / 64 / 128 (pixel)> (32)
D Press the [Enter] key to accept the default value.
e. EDGE (pixel) (4)
It will take approximately 30 seconds until the next prompt appears.
f. SELECT GRAPH TYPE <1:STND / 2:BONE / 3:MANUAL>
D Select MANUAL
g. Enter MAX FREQUENCY (LP/cm) (12)
h. Enter MEAN FILE No. <116>
D Enter 1 as the mean file No.
This mean file contains the result of analysis performed by this MTF Survey program.
6.
Press the [End] key twice.
7.
Proceed to Section 7-2-3.
75
SYSTEM

REV 0
7-2
2242063
7-2-3
Displaying the Result (MTF Curve)
1.
Select Support display from the Maintenance menu.
2.
Select File Selection.

a. Enter M from FILE NAME.
b. Enter 0 from MIN.
c. Enter 1000 for MAX.
3.
Select Set Cursor.

a. Enter 1 for CHANNEL.
b. Enter 1 for DATA. (the calculated mean file No.)
4.
Select Profile (H).

a. Enter 0 for DATA MIN.
b. Enter 1.2 for DATA MAX.
A graph is drawn, as is shown in illustration 74.
Illustration 74
MTF Curve
1.000
0.800
EXAMPLE
0.600
0.400
0.200
2.000
4.000
6.000
76
8.000
10.000
SYSTEM

REV 0
7-2
7-2-3
5.
2242063
Displaying the Result (MTF Curve) (continued)
From the graph, read lp/cm values for 50% and 10% of the MTF curve.
Write down the values in the table below.
Illustration 75
Reading MTF Curve
1.000
0.800
EXAMPLE
0.600
50%
0.400
0.200
10%
2.000
MTF
4.000
6.000
8.000
50%
10.000
10%
Measured Value
lp/cm
77
lp/cm
SYSTEM

blank
2242063
78
SYSTEM

REV 0
2242063
OPERATOR CONSOLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 1 POWER UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1
1-2
11
OVERVIEW (INCLUDE: READING HEXADECIMAL LED STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREPARATION FOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1
Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2
Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST SEQUENCE AND TEST ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1
Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2
Test Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERROR CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRASH SAVE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
13
13
14
15
15
16
112
113
SECTION 2 OFFLINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
1-3
1-4
1-5
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2
External Display Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3
Extension Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OFFLINE TEST OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1
Preoperation for OffLine Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2
OffLine Test Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPW OFFLINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1
Required Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2
Test Items (CPW OffLine Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPU OFFLINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-1
2-4-2
Test Item (IPU OffLine Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-3
Test Items Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISP OFFLINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-1
2-5-2
Test Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-3
Test Items (DISP OffLine Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MISC OFFLINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-1
2-6-2
Test Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-3
Test Items (MISC OffLine Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SBPU OFFLINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-1
2-7-2
Test Items (SBPU OffLine Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
23
24
25
25
27
28
28
28
29
29
29
210
211
211
211
212
213
213
213
214
216
216
216
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2242063
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 3 ETC BOARD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1
31
ETC POWERON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2
Reading ETC Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3
Running the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4
LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-5
Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ETC OFFLINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2
Required hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3
Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-4
External display Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-5
OffLine Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
32
33
35
38
310
310
310
311
312
312
314
SECTION 4 LED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
3-2
3-3
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
CPW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ODC2 (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTC (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ETC (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
APPENDIX A CREATING A CRASH SAVE DISKETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1
ii
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2242063
SECTION 1 POWER UP SEQUENCE
1-1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (INCLUDE: READING HEXADECIMAL LED STATUS)
The PowerON test program is used for OC selfdiagnostics during the Power up sequence, and is resident in the
ROM on the CPW assy.
This test program has two categories: Power On Test 1 (PON1) and Power On Test 2 (PON2).
The PON Test 2 includes more detailed tests than PON Test 1, and takes longer to run.
PON Test 1 is normally selected during routine customer operation. PON Test 2 can be used by the field engineer
to perform a more detailed analysis in the event of an error occurring on the system.
During test execution, the test currently running, along with the description/name and status (pass/fail), are identified
in 2 or 3 ways depending on the test concerned as follows:
1.
CPW LEDs (all tests)
2.
CRT display monitor (all tests, except CPW Phase 1, and DISP Phase 1 tests)
3.
Terminal connected to CPW RS232C output (all tests)
See Section 1-2 for more details.

If at any point during the PON Tests an error is encountered, the testing is halted and the failed test number/code
remains on the CPW LEDs. With the exception of CPW Phase 1 and DISP Phase 1 tests, the test name/description
will also be displayed on the CRT monitor along with a brief error description.
Note
There normally no need to connect a CPW RS232C terminal, since no additional information other
than that on the LEDs and monitor can be obtained during PON Tests. Connecting a terminal is only
necessary for the execution of the off line tests.
The total processing time is as follows:
Table 11
Test Processing Time

Test Processing Time
Time from Test Start, to System

Ready
PON 1 Test
4:00 minutes.
4:16 minutes.
PON 2 Test
13:05 minutes.
13:21 minutes.
11
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-1
2242063
OVERVIEW (continued)
Reading Hexadecimal Numbers from LEDs

The hexadecimal number in each rectangle herein represents the LED status displayed on the CPW board. Read
the LEDs from top to bottom (MSB to LSB). Decode the top four LEDs to create the most significant hex digit (the
leftmost digit) and the bottom four to create the least significant hex digit (the rightmost digit). All hexadecimal codes
are displayed with the letter H.
More detailed status and information is displayed on the CRT from CPW Phase 2 test, so it is normally not necessary
to decode the LEDs status.
Example:
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
bit
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
(LSB)
(90H)
F means Illuminated and equals 1: f equals 0. LEDs are set at the start of each routine. If any error occurs during
selftesting, the LEDs display the corresponding error code.
12
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-2
1-2-1
2242063
PREPARATION FOR TEST

Switch Setting
Set the DIP switch on the CPW Assy (location 8A1) as required according to the following:
ON
OFF
:1
:0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Normally
OFF
Test Mode Selection
Communication Speed
(Unit: Baud)
Test Skip
9600
OFFLine Test
1200
Power On Test 2
2400
Power On Test 1
19200
X: Dont Care.
The following parameters are set by default with

each speed setting and cannot be cancelled;
1. Character length = 8 bits
2. Stop Bit = 1 bit
3. Party = None
The DIP SW setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing the DIP switch setting
during test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want to change the parameters, first set the DIP
SW accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start the test.
Note
This test program does not write any data to the HD, but it does require a properly formatted HD.
i.e.: The tests will run with a normal operational HD, but not with an unformatted replacement HD.
13
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-2-2
2242063
Hardware Configuration
The following illustration shows the minimum hardware configuration required to run the test program.
Illustration 11
Hardware Configuration
System Bus
CPW Assy
This test program supports one or two

HDD; they are selected by the SW setting
on the CPW. See the illustration below for
the proper setting.
HDD #0
HDD #0
IMPORTANT NOTE:
IO Bus
The current revision of the CPW board

does not support dual HDD use.
IPU2 Assy
DISP Assy
CRT
ON
OFF
ON
:1
:0
1 2 3 4
TPC Assy
Normally all OFF.
Always OFF.
Number of HD
TPC Assy
14
One HD
Two HDs (Not available)
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-3
1-3-1
2242063
TEST SEQUENCE AND TEST ITEMS

Test Sequence
The following illustration is a flow chart showing the sequence of the Power On Test program and where the results
are displayed.
Illustration 12
System
Start
(Power On or
Reset)
Test Sequence Flowchart
Power On Test
Program
CPW Test
(Phase 1)
CPW LED
Activity
Display Monitor
Activity
(CPW RS232C)
Activity
Blank
Test Number and

Pass/Fail Status
Blank
Test Number and

Pass/Fail Status
Test Number and

Pass/Fail Status
Test Number and

Pass/Fail Status
Test Number and

Pass/Fail Status
Test Number and

Pass/Fail Status
Test Number and

Pass/Fail Status
Test Number and

Pass/Fail Status
Test Number and

Pass/Fail Status
Test Number and

Pass/Fail Status
System Preparation
Sloader
Then
Terminated
Test Number
$11$18
Status
OK
DISP Test
(Phase 1)
Test Number
$30$38
Status
OK
CPW Test
(Phase 2)
Test Group
$1F
Status
OK
IPU2 Test
Test Number/Group
$40$4E
Status
OK
DISP Test
(Phase 2)
Test Number/Group
$39$3F
Status
OK
MISC Test
Test Number/Group
$2F$24
Status
OK
End
System
Preparation
$80
$8F
$90
15
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
1-3-2
2242063
Test Items
Tables to list the associated parameters of each individual P ON Test. These tables all have the same format and
include the following information;
Test number/code and name
Test mode under which the test is selected (Power On Test1, Power On Test2, or both)
Hardware to be checked most likely failed assy, in the event of an error occurring.
Test sequence
The CPW LEDs display a unique test number/code for CPW Phase 1 and DISP Phase 2 tests. Following these tests,
some codes are duplicated. The CRT (on the Operator Console) displays the test program status from CPW TEST
(Phase 2 ) onwards.
A terminal connected to the CPW will display the test program status fro all tests.
Note
shows what boards or devices which are thoroughly tested.
shows what boards or devices which are partly testes.
If an error occurs during P ON TEST, the test and CPW LEDs stop to run. In addition, for the test
after CPW test (Phase 2), the error message can be displayed on the CRT monitor.
16
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-3-2
2242063
Test Items (continued)

Table 12
CPW Test (Phase 1)
Test Item
LED Test Mode

Status
CPW
1
2
SRAM W/R/V Test (1)
$11
CPW (1) Bus Error Test (ROM)
$12
CPW (2) ROM SUM Check Test
$13
CPW (3) Interrupt Handler W/R/V Test
$14
CPW (4) Control/Status Reg. W/R/V Test
$15
CPW (5) DMAC Reg. W/R/V Test
$16
CPW (6) Bus Error Test (IPU MD)
$17
CPW (10) CPWDRAM W/R/V Test (1)
$18
Hardware to be Checked
IPU
DISP
MISC
TPC
Others
* : There is a discrepancy between the contents of PON Test1 and PON Test2.
Table 13
DISP Test (Phase 1)
Test Item
LED Test Mode

Status
CPW
1
2
DISP (1) ACRTC Initialize Test
$30
DISP (2) ACRTC Pattern RAM W/R/V Test
$31
DISP (3) OVL Plane Control Reg. W Test
$32
DISP (4) DISP Control Reg. W/R/V Test
$33
DISP (5) Int. Mask Reg. W/R/V Test
$34
DISP (6) ACRTC Interrupt Test
$35
DISP (7) VSYNC Interrupt Test
$36
DISP (8) OVL Plane Memory W/R/V Test
$37
DISP (9) ACRTC DMA Test
$38
IPU
DISP
MISC
TPC
Others
17
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-3-2
2242063
Table 14
CPW Test (Phase 2)
Test Item
LED Test Mode

Status
CPW
1
2
CPW (7) FDC Reg. W/R Test
$1F
CPW (8) SCSIC Reg. W/R Test
$1F
CPW (9) SRAM W/R/V Test (2)
$1F
CPW (10) CPWDRAm W/R/V Test (2)
$1F
CPW (11) Calendar Read Test
$1F
CPW (12) DMA (CPWDRAM) Test
$1F
CPW (13) DMA (IPU MD) Test
$1F
CPW (14) HD Read Test
$1F
IPU
DISP
MISC
TPC
Others
HD
Table 15
IPU Test
Test Item
LED
Stat s
Status
Test
Mode
1
CPW
IPU (1) Reset Reg. R/W Test
$40
IPU (2) Abort Reg. R/W Test
$40
IPU (3) Ext. MD Reg. from CPU Read Test
$40
IPU (4) Interrupt Req. Reg.1 to IPU R/W Test
$40
$40
$40
IPU (7) Interrupt Ack. Reg. to IPU R/W Test
$40
IPU (8) Extended MD Check
$41
IPU (9) Command Area Access Test
$42
IPU (10) CPU MD Access Test
$43
IPU (11) CPU Extended ME Access Test
$43
IPU (12) DMA Test
$44
IPU (13) Vector Area Fetch Test
$45
IPU
DISP MISC
TPC
Others
Ext MD Slot 1,2
Ext MD Slot 1,2
18
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-3-2
2242063

Table 15
IPU Test (continued)
Test Item
LED
Stat s
Status
Test
Mode
1
CPW
IPU
DISP MISC
TPC
Others
IPU (14) Interrupt Status Reg. Read Test
$46
IPU (15) Interrupt Level Reg. Read Test
$46
IPU (16) Interrupt Mask Reg. R/W Test
$46
IPU (17) Interrupt ACK Reg. R/W Test
$46
IPU (18) Interrupt Req. Reg. Write Test
$46
IPU (19) Extended MD Reg. Read Test
$46
IPU (20) Status LED Reg. R/W Test
$46
IPU (21) Switch Reg. Read Test
$46
IPU (22) Driver Area Access Test
$47
IPU (23) Interrupt Request Test 1
$49
IPU (24) Interrupt Request Test 2
$49
IPU (25) Simultaneously Access Test
$4A
IPU (261) Driver Test 1
$4B
$4B
$4B
IPU (27) Bus Error Test
$4B
IPU (28) IPU MD Access Test
$4C
IPU (29) IPU Extended MD Access Test 1
$4C
Ext MD Slot 1,2
IPU (30) IPU Extended MD Access Test 2
$4C
Ext MD Slot 1,2
IPU (31) CPU/IPU Access Test (Bank 0)
$4D
IPU (32) CPU/IPU Access Test (Bank 1)
$4D
IPU (33) Memory Module Test
$4E
Ext MD Slot 1,2
19
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-3-2
2242063

Table 16
DISP Test (Phase 2)
Test Item
LED Test Mode

Status
CPW
1
2
DISP (10) DISP IMG Reg. W/R/V Test
$39
DISP (11) Buf Count Reg. W/R/V Test
$3A
DISP (12) Buf Reg. W/R/V Test
$3B
DISP (13) Buf Size Reg. W/R/V Test
$3C
DISP (14) VSYNC Interrupt Test
$3D
DISP (15) IFB W/R/V Test
$3E
DISP (16) DAS Buf W/R/V Test
$3F
IPU
DISP
MISC
TPC
Others
110
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-3-2
2242063

Table 17
MISC Test
Test Item
LED
Status
MISC (1) WR Reg. Intro W Test
$2F
MISC (2) Inter Status R Test
$2F
MISC (3) WR CC Inter Mask W Test
$2F
MISC (4) Test Mode W Test
$2F
MISC (5) INT Mask CTL W Test
$2F
MISC (6) OC I/F Dual Port RAM R Test
$2E
MISC (7) XG Status R Test
$2D
MISC (8) Scan key SW Data Reg. R Test
$2C
MISC (9) Scan PNL display Enable W Test
$2C
MISC (10) Scan Panel Lamp On Test
$2C
MISC (11) Auto Voice CTL W Test
$2B
MISC (12) Voice Time Data R Test
$2B
MISC (13) SM Buzz CRL W Test
$2B
MISC (14) Scan Key Status A,B R Test
$2C
MISC (15) GTX POn Status R Test
$2A
MISC (16) KB Key CodeReg./Status R Test
$29
MISC (17) KB Lamp Reg. W/R/V Test
$29
MISC (18) KB Beep Reg. W Test
$29
MISC (19) Track Ball CNT R Test
$28
MISC (20) TPC I/F Dual Port RAM W/R/V Test
$27
MISC (21) MFC Status R Test
$26
MISC (22) MFC Write Reg. W, Read Reg. R Test
$26
MISC (23) Scan INT Mask CTL W Test
$25
MISC (24) XG Control W Test
$24
Test Mode
CPW
IPU
DISP
MISC
TPC
Others
111
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
1-4
2242063
ERROR CODE
Refer to the following Error Code Description when the CPW fails during the powerup sequence due to the Operating
system failure.
Table 18
LED Status
Error Code
Condition
Remedy
D0
Bus error due to accessing nonexistent Suspect memory or reload software.

memory address or executing inadequate instruction.
D1
Address error due to word reference to Suspect memory or reload software.

odd address.
D2 D8
Exception due to incorrect instruction or Suspect memory or reload software.

corrupted memory.
E0
Abnormal termination due to abort of OS Error information is stored in crash

save area.
related task.
E1
Abnormal operation system.
Error information is stored in crash

save area.
112
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-5
2242063
CRASH SAVE AREA
When abnormal termination is caused by any failure (Bus Error, Address Error, or OS task crash), error information
is stored into an area of Memory called the Crash Save Area. Each processor has a Crash Save Area.
The Crash Save Area contains the following information:
Program Counter
Status Register
Other registers
LED status
at crash
For details, see illustration 13.

The Crash Save Area on each processor is saved onto the hard disk at poweron. You can also save this information
onto floppy diskette as shown in illustration 14. Use the following procedure to transfer Crash Save Area information
to floppy diskette.
Under crash condition:
1.
Label a crash save floppy diskette and insert it into the floppy disk drive.
Note
The first time you use this diskette, initialize it for a crash save according to Appendix A, How to Make
Crash Save disk.
2.
Pull the system reset switch with the diskette in place to automatically transfer a copy of the crash save area
of each processor onto the diskette. The system rest switch is located beneath OC keyboard console extension.
3.
Use the following procedure to read the contents of the diskette.

a. Insert the BOOT diskette into the floppy disk drive.
b. Set the BOOT select switch on the CPW board to the following positions:
ON
1 2 3 4
c. Pull the system reset switch.

d. Make sure the > prompt appears on the CRT monitor, and then remove the BOOT diskette and inset the
crash cave diskette.
e. The diskette contents should resemble illustration 14.
113
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
1-5
2242063
CRASH SAVE AREA (continued)

Illustration 13
Crash Save Area
Crash Save Area

Relative
Address
0
Address A00(H) AFF(H)
Program Counter (4 Byte)

(spare)
Status Register (2 Byte)
Register
D0 (4 Byte per Each)

:
:
D7
A0
:
:
A7
48
User Stack Pointer (4 Byte)
4C
Bus Error Vector (4 Byte)
50
Function (2 Byte)
52
Access Address (4 Byte)
56
Command Register (2 Byte)
58
Status Register (2 Byte)
5A
Program Counter (4 Byte)
64
LED Status (1 Byte)
70
Date (4 Byte)
74
Time (4 Byte)
Access Address when Bus error or address error

has occurs.
occurs
Applicable
A
licable for LED status D0(H) or D1(H) ONLY.
Program address causing Bus error / address
error.
error
Applicable
A
licable for LED status D0(H) or D1(H) ONLY.
(Spare)
File Processor ONLY

ONLY.
(Spare)
80
Error Status (1 Byte)
82
DMA Transfer Address (4 Byte)
86
Reserved
88
HD Physical Sector Number (4 Byte)
90
HDC Command Parameter (16 Byte)
A0
HDC Result Parameter (16 Byte)
FE
DMAC CER (1 Byte)

HDC Command Code
(Spare)
114
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
1-5
2242063
CRASH SAVE AREA (continued)

Illustration 14
Crash Save onto Floppy Disk
Crash
System Reset
Save
CPW Memory
0
micro:textC8
micro:textC
A00(H) Crash Save Area

B00(H)
Floppy Disk
Sector 0
B00(H)
> FN FDMP:0.&.DUMP.SY CR
FDMP:0000
.DUMP
.SY (00,00)
> FD 0 10 CR
000000 00 00 54 3C 00 33 20 00
00 00 00 38
000010 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 40
00 00 00 06
000020 00 01 26 CA 00 01 28 CA
00 01 31 16
000030 00 00 53 E2 00 01 26 CA
00 FF 31 00
000040 00 01 38 00 00 00 0B EE
00 01 29 8E
000050 10 35 00 FF 03 81 10 28
20 00 00 00
000060 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
000070 00 00 0A F1 02 94 10 90
00 00 00 00
000080 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
000090 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
0000A0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
0000B0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
0000C0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
0000D0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
0000E0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
0000F0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
>
115
00
00
00
00
00
67
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
02
00
02
00
E4
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
09
0C
09
24
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
09
90
00
C0
52
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
..T<....8.......
......@.........
..&...<....]....
..S...&...1.....
..8.......>...&R
.5......<...G...
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
CPW Crash
Save Area
OPERATOR CONSOLE

blank
2242063
116
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 2 OFFLINE TEST
2-1
2-1-1
GENERAL
Overview
The offline tests for diagnosing each of the following electronic boards and some components (Hard disk drive, Audio
Assy, etc.) installed within the Operator Console are provided on each separate floppy diskettes.
D CPW
D MISC (and TPC)
D DISP
D IPU
D SBPU
The offline tests for MISC include communication tests between CPW and the processor equipped within the Gantry.
The offline tests perform more extensive diagnostics than the online tests described in the previous section.
The offline tests report which device or operation is the cause of a system or information system failure.
The offline tests except for the CPW board are provided on floppy diskettes. The offline test for the CPW board
is provided on the ROM on the CPW board. The offline tests are interactive ones, requiring an external display terminal.
The test proceedings or error information occurred during the test execution are shown on the CPW status LEDs as
well as on the display. The status LEDs turn off when all the offline tests have been finished without an error.
Illustration 21 shows the general flow of the offline tests except the ETC offline test.
21
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2-1-1
2242063
Overview (continued)
Illustration 21
System
General Flow of OffLine Test
OffLine Test
PowerOn
Primary Test for CPW

Failed
Error Code Displayed on LEDs
Passed
Main Menu for OffLine Test
CPW Test
ROM
MISC Test
FD
DISP Test
FD
IPU Test
FD
SBPU Test
FD
Note:
22
To exit the offline test, set the Dip SW

on the CPW board and reset the system.
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2-1-2
2242063
External Display Terminal
Terminal Settings
Use a display terminal which accepts ASCII characters. The settings for the terminal are described below:
D X Parameter (XON and XOFF Control): not effective
D Character Length: 8 bits
D Parity: none
D Stop Bit Length: 1 bit
D Rate (Communication Speed): 9600, 1200, 2400, or 19200 (bits/s) This set should be the same as the
set value by the Test Dip Switch on the CPW Board. see illustration 22.
D Carriage Return Code: CR+LF ($0D $0A)
D Carriage Return: automatic at a line end
D Local Echo: none (The offline test program echos back).
Key Function
The following Table shows the keys used for the test programs.
Table 21
Key Function
Key
09, AF
RET
Q
Function
Selection of test items; Values to be entered
Range designator (used for address designation)
Enter; Execution of a step
Abort
SPACE
Pause (toggle operation)
others
ignored
23
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
2-1-3
2242063
Extension Boards
Either one of two kinds of extension boards is used depending on the circuit board, as shown below:
D EXTDR2 Assy (P9191YY) is only used for: IPU, DISP, SBPU.
D EXTDR Assy (P9500YY) is only used for: other boards listed above (CPW, MISC, other).
CAUTION
Board Destruction!
Do not use the EXTDR2 Assy (P9191YY) for boards other than IPU, DISP, SBPU, or for other
slots except for IPU, DISP, SBPU; otherwise, the board installed to the EXTDR2 Assy, and
some other boards together will be destructed.
24
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2-2
2-2-1
2242063
OFFLINE TEST OPERATION

Preoperation for OffLine Test
Set the Test Switch on the CPW board according to illustration below, and switch ON or reset the system. Then the
following is performed in the described order:
Illustration 22
OffLine Test Dip Switch Setting

ON
OFF
:1
:0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Normally
OFF
Test Mode Selection
Communication Speed
(Unit: Baud)
Test Skip
9600
OFFLine Test
1200
Power On Test 2
2400
Power On Test 1
19200
X: Dont Care.
The following parameters are set by default with

each speed setting and cannot be cancelled;
1. Character length = 8 bits
2. Stop Bit = 1 bit
3. Party = None
D Execution of the Power On CPW SRAM W/R/V Test (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $11)
D Creation of Interrupt Vector Table and Setting of Stack Pointer
D Initialization of devices
D Calling the test (Power On Test1, Power On Test2, or OffLine Test) according to the Test Switch setting.
Processing for Error Interrupt

If an error interrupt listed below occurs, the YMON (YMS Monitor) program is called.
D Bust error Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $10)
D Address Error Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $10)
D Undefined Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $10)
25
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
2-2-1
2242063
Preoperation for OffLine Test (continued)
Processing for Abort

When the Abort switch is pressed, which is always accepted by the system, the YMON is called.
Primary Test for CPW Board

Prior to displaying the offline test menu, the primary tests are performed on the CPW Board as listed below. If an
error occurs during the tests, the offline tests can not be called. These are the same as the tests performed in the
Power On Test. Refer to Tables 12 and 14.
D CPW (1) Bus Error Test (ROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $12)
D CPW (2) ROM Sum Check Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $13)
D CPW (3) Interrupt Handler W/R/V Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $14)
D CPW (4) Control/Status Register W/R/V Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $15)
D CPW (5) DMAC Register W/R/V Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $16)
D CPW (7) FDC Register W/R Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $17)
D CPW (10) CPWDRAM W/R/V Test (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $18)
D CPW (12) DMA (CPWDRAM) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $19)
26
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
2-2-2
2242063
OffLine Test Main Menu
After the CPW primary tests are finished without an error, the following menu is displayed:
OFF LINE TEST MAIN MENU
1) CPW
2) OTHER
BOARD TEST
BOARD TEST (PROGRAM LOADING FROM FD)
SELECT MENU > _

The offline tests except for the CPW Board are provided on floppy diskettes. When 2 is selected in the above menu,
the following is displayed:
OFF LINE TEST MAIN MENU
1) CPW
2) OTHER
BOARD TEST
BOARD TEST (PROGRAM LOADING FROM FD)
SELECT MENU > 2

MOUNT PROGRAM FD
HIT RET KEY !
(requesting the floppy diskette to be mounted in the drive)
(Set the floppy diskette and press the Return key)

TESTPROGRAM LOADING
OFFLINE TEST Loading File = xxxxxxxx
LOADING COMPLETE !
xxxx OFFLINE TEST Rev.xx
(displays test menus)
.
.
.
27
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2-3
2242063
CPW OFFLINE TEST
2-3-1
Required Hardware
D CPW Assy
D IPU Assy
D SBB Assy
D HDD
D FDD
D Display Terminal
2-3-2
Test Items (CPW OffLine Test)

Table 22
CPW OffLine Test Items
Test
No.
LED
Status CPW
Test Item
IPU
DISP
MISC
TPC
Others
Loop Test (Power On Test2)
$1F
CPWDRAM Write/Read/Verify Test
$1F
SRAM Write/Read/Verify Test
$1F
HD Test
$1F
1) HD Write/Read/Verify Test
$1F
HD
2) HD Selfdiagnostics
$1F
HD
3) HD Formatting
$1F
HD
FD Test
$1F
1) FD Write/Read/Verify Test
$1F
FD
2) FD Formatting
$1F
FD
1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test1 (DRAM DRAM)
$1F
2) Bus Error Test
$1F
1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test2 (DRAM IPU MD)
$1F
1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test3 (DRAM HD)
$1F
HD
1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test4 (DRAM FD)
$1F
FD
: Hardware to be checked.
HD
: Hardware concerned in the check.
28
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2-4
2-4-1
2242063
IPU OFFLINE TEST

Required Hardware
D IPU Assy
D CPW Assy (This board must be operate normally.)
D FDD
D Display Terminal
D FD (IPU OffLine Test Software : P9190ZB)
2-4-2
Test Item (IPU OffLine Test)

Table 23
IPU OffLine Test Items

Test
No.
Test Item
CPW
IPU
DISP
MISC
TPC
Others
Extended MD Register Read Test
Sequential Test
Extended MD Slot 1,2
System Bus Access Test
Program Fetch Test
i860 Driver Test
Basic Function Test
Basic Subroutine Test
Memory Module Test
29
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
2-4-3
2242063
Test Items Description
D Extended MD Register Read Test
Tests the read operation of the Extended MD Register, which contain the information of the equipped MD
capacity and address. The correct result of this test must be confirmed prior to performing the following
tests.
D Sequential Test
Performs the System Bus Access Test (3) to Basic Subroutine Test (7) sequentially. The following tests
are not performed in this test.
Extended MD Register Read Test (1)
A part of Basic Function Test (6)
Memory Module Test (8)
D System Bus Access Test
Tests registers and memory which can be accessed via the System bus.
D Program Fetch Test
Tests mainly fetch of the programs residing in the MD vector area.
D i860 Driver Test
Tests the driver programs required for execution of the i860 application software
D Basic Function Test
Tests the i860 basic functions, such as memory read/write using the driver programs, and simultaneous
memory access, which are required for execution of the i860 complex application software.
D Basic Subroutine Test
Tests more dynamical operations, using the basic subroutines which are used in the application programs.
D Memory Module Test
Tests each SIMM constituting the IPU MD.
210
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
2-5
2-5-1
2242063
DISP OFFLINE TEST

Required Hardware
D DISP Assy
D CPW Assy
D IPU Assy
D 14 CRT
D FDD
D Display Terminal
D FD (DISP OffLine Test Software : P9190ZC)
2-5-2
Test Menu Screen
After the initialization of the DISP Offline Test is completed, the terminal displays the following menu.
DISPLAY OFF LINE TEST
1)
2)
3)
4)
*SELECT TEST ITEM (SEQUENTIAL TEST)

SELECT TEST MODE (SINGLE)
RUN
END
ENTER NO. _
If you select 1), the terminal displays the list of all the tests.
The asterisk (*) indicates that the menu item is currently selected.
211
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2-5-3
2242063
Test Items (DISP OffLine Test)
Table 24
DISP OffLine Test Items

Test
No.
Test Item
Sequential Test
ACTC Pattern RAM Write/Read/Verify Test
OVL Plane Control Register Write Test
DISP Control Register Write/Read/Verify Test
Interrupt Mask Register Write/Read/Verify Test
VSYNC Interrupt Test
OVL Plane Memory Write/Read/Verify Test
ACRTC DMA Test
OVL Plane Control Test
10
OVL Scroll Test
11
OVL Split Test
12
OVL Test Pattern
13
DISP Image Register Write/Read\Verify Test
14
Buffer Count Register Write/Read/Verify Test
15
Buffer Size Register Write/Read/Verify Test
16
VSYNC interrupt Test
17
IFB Write/Read/Verify Test
18
IFB Write/Read/Verify Test
19
DAS Buffer Write/Read/Verify Test
20
IFB Display Test
21
OVL Test Pattern & IFB Display Test
CPW
212
IPU
DISP
MISC
TPC
Others
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
2-6
2242063
MISC OFFLINE TEST

Note
Always rest the system after finishing the MISC OFFLINE TEST, otherwise, a system error will occur if this or other offline test is run.
2-6-1
Required Hardware
D MISC Assy
D CPW Assy
D TPC Assy
D TPC SUB Assy
D FDD
D TOUCH PNL
D LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
D AUDIO Assy
D PNL Assy
D PNL IF Assy
D KB SUB Assy
D Trackball / Keyboard
D SBB Assy
D Display Terminal
D FD (MSC OFFLINE TEST Software : P9190ZD)
2-6-2
Test Menu Screen
After the initialization of the MISC Offline Test is completed, the terminal displays the following menu.
MISC OFF LINE TEST
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
0)
TEST SELECT & RUN

PANEL INTERFACE TEST
TPC INTERFACE TEST
KB/TB INTERFACE TEST
OC INTERFACE TEST
MFC CTL TEST
RS232C TEST
END
ENTER NO. _
213
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2-6-3
2242063
Test Items (MISC OffLine Test)
Table 25
Test
No.
1
MISC OffLine Test Items
Test Item
LED
Status CPW
IPU
DISP
MISC
TPC
Others
Panel Interface Test

1) Lamp Test
$2B
PNL Assy
2) Key Switch Test
$2C
PNL I/F Assy
3) Touch Panel Buzzer Test
$2B
Audio Interface Test

1) Play Test
$2B
2) Play Back Test
$2B
3) Record Test
$2B
4) Time Data Test
$2B
5) Bank Memory W/R/V Test
$2B
6) Load Test
$2B
7) Dump Test
$2B
8) Auto Voice Load/Dump/Verify Test
$2B
Audio Assy
TPC Interface Test

1) Touch Panel Display Test
$27
TPC, TPC Sub Assy
2) Touch Panel Sense Test
$27
LCD Touch Panel
3) Dual Port RAM W/R/V Test
$27
TPC Assy
1) Key Switch Test
$29
KB Sub Assy
2) Trackball Test
$28
Keyboard
3) Buzzer Test
$29
Keyboard/Trackball Interface Test
T kb ll
Trackball
214
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2-6-3
2242063
Test Items (MISC OffLine Test) (continued)

Table 25
Test
No.
5
MISC OffLine Test Items (continued)
Test Item
LED
Status CPW
IPU
DISP
MISC
TPC
Others
OC Interface Test
1) Dual Port RAM W/R/V Test
$2E
2) OCIF Internal Loop Test
$2E
3) CPWOCIFMP Communication Test
$2E
4) CPWOCIFMPTP Communication Test
$2E
5) CPWOCIFMPGP Communication Test
$2E
6) CPWOCIFMPSP Communication Test
$2E
7) CPWOCIFMPSPXG Comm. Test
$2E
MFC Control Test

1) MFC Dual Port RAM W/R Test
$26
2) MFC Status Test
$26
3) MFC Interrupt Clear Test
$26
RS232C Test
1) CBF SIO AUX SIO Test
$2F
2) CBF SIO AUX SIO Test
$2F
215
RS232C Loop
Connector
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2-7
2-7-1
2242063
SBPU OFFLINE TEST

Required Hardware
D SBPU Assy
D CPW Assy
D IPU Assy
D FDD
D SBB Assy
D Display Terminal
D FD (SBPU OFFLINE TEST Software : P9190ZE)
2-7-2
Test Items (SBPU OffLine Test)

Table 26
SBPU OffLine Test Items
Test
No.
1
LED
Status CPW
Test Item
IPU
DISP
MISC SBPU
Others
Memory Access Test

1) Pixel memory Write/Read/Verify Test
$51
2) Convolved Data Memory Write/Read/Verify Test
$52
3) Initial Channel Memory Write/Read/Verify Test
$53
4) Sizing Image Memory Write/Read/Verify Test
$54
5) Channel Increment Register W/R/V Test
$55
6) Rotate Register Write/Read/Verify Test
$56
7) Interrupt Mask Register Write/Read/Verify Test
$57
Back Projection Test
$58
216
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 3 ETC BOARD TEST

The ETC Test programs contain the following:
D ETC POWERON TEST
D ETC OFFLINE TEST
D ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION
Note
Each test for the ETC does not depend on OC selfdiagnostics test (PowerON/OffLine tests), so
that both selfdiagnostics tests of OC and ETC can be performed at the same time.
31
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
3-1
3-1-1
2242063
ETC POWERON TEST

General
The ETC (DCX Ethernet Controller Interface) PowerON Test program is used for ETC selfdiagnostics during the
Power up sequence, and is resident in the ROM on the ETC assy.
During test execution, the test currently running, along with the description/name and status (pass/fail), are identified
in ETC LEDs.
If at any point during the PowerON Tests an error is encountered, the testing is halted and the error code displays
on the ETC LEDs.
3-1-2
Reading ETC Board LEDs
The lower byte (8 bits) indicates the ETC process, the ETC PowerON Test and current status in startup sequence,
and the upper byte (8 bits) indicates the ETC status.
Illustration 31
ETC Board LED Configuration
(For Hardware)
MSB (bit 15)
bit 14
:
:
:
Current Status (Interrupt etc.)
bit 8
bit 7
ETC Status Routine

bit 1
LSB (bit 0)
32
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
3-1-3
2242063
Running the Test
Switch Setting
Set the DIP switch on the ETC Assy (location S8A) as required according to the following:
D SW8A Power ON test Perform/Skip. OffLine test setting.
Illustration 32
ETC Dip Switch Setting

ON
1 2 3 4
1
0
B0 : Not used. Set to 0
B2 : OffLine Test:
0 Not perform test
1 Perform test
B3 : Power On Test:
0 Perform test
1 Skip test
Note
The DIP SW setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing the
DIP switch setting during test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want to
change the parameters, first set the DIP SW accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start the
test.
33
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
3-1-3
2242063
Running the Test (continued)
Test Sequence
The illustration 33 is a flowchart showing the sequence of the ETC test programs, including Power On Test procedure, and where the results are displayed in LEDs.
Illustration 33
ETC Test Sequence Flowchart
System
Start
(Power On or
Reset)
Test program
ETC LED
Activity
$FF$00
Hardware test
ETC PON
Test
Status
Test Number
$01$21
Status
Test Number
$39$40
Status
Test Group
$40$8X
OK
ETC OffLine
Test
OK
ETC Initializing
&
Starting Up
Procedure
OK
End
System
Preparation
$90
Note
The ETC OffLine test can be skipped by changing the ETC Dip switch setting (SW8A). For detail
information of this test, refer to Section 3-2 ETC OFFLINE TEST.
34
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
3-1-4
2242063
LED Indications
Test Items
Table 31
ETC Board LED Status (PowerOn/OffLine Test)

LED Status (F:Illuminate)
Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Hardware Test Mode Check
fffffffF
LANCE (Ethernet Controller LSI) Invalid Access Check
ffffffFf
DRAM Invalid Access Check
ffffffFF
Dual Port RAM Invalid Access Check
fffffFff
ETC Control Register Invalid Access Check
fffffFfF
Invalid Address Access Check
fffffFFf
SRAM Access check (Byte Mode)
fffffFFF
SRAM Access Check (Word Mode)
ffffFfff
SRAM Access Check (Long Word Mode)
ffffFffF
Copying Program Initialized by CPU to SRAM
ffffFfFf
Executing CPU Initialized Program
ffffFfFF
EPROM Writing Check (Verify Bus Error)
ffffFFff
LANCE Interrupt Control Register Test
fffFffff
System Bus Interrupt control Register Test
fffFfffF
Serial Port Interrupt Test
fffFffFf
System Bus Interrupt Test
fffFffFF
DRAM/Dual Port RAM control Register Test
fffFfFff
DRAM Access Check (Byte Mode)
fffFfFfF
DRAM Access Check (Word Mode)
fffFfFFf
DRAM Access Check (Long Word Mode)
fffFfFFF
Dual Poet RAM Access Check
fffFFfff
LANCE Control Register Test
fffFFffF
LANCE Internal Loop Back Test
fffFFfFf
LANCE Collision Detect & Retry Test
fffFFfFF
LANCE External Loop Back Test
fffFFFff
Internal Bus Arbitration Test (Part 1)
ffFfffff
Internal Bus Arbitration Test (Part 2)
ffFffffF
ETC Offline Test is being executed
ffFFFffF
Hardware Test End
fFffffff
35
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
3-1-4
2242063
LED Indications (continued)

Table 32
ETC Board LED Status (Initializing & StartingUp)

Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Supervisor Stack Pointer is being Set
fFfffffF
Creating Exception Vector Table
fFffffFf
SRAM Test (Only Executed when Hardware Test is Skipped)
fFffffFF
DRAM Test (Only Executed when Hardware Test is Skipped)
fFfffFff
Setting Initialization of Selected OS
fFfFffff
OS Initialization
fFfFfffF
Serial Port Initialize
fFfFFfff
System Clock Initialization
fFfFFffF
System Bus I/F Initialization
fFfFFfFf
RT Scope Pointer Initialization is being Set
fFFfffff
RT Scope Initialization
fFFffffF
RT Scope Start
fFFffFff
Basic Task On ROM is being Executed
fFFffFfF
Memory Partition is being Set
fFFffFFf
Queue is being Set
fFFffFFF
Semaphore Flag is being Made
fFFfFfff
Mail Post is being Created/First Mail Transmit
fFFfFffF
Alternate Table or Pointer is being Set
fFFfFfFf
System Clock Start
fFFfFFff
System Bus Interrupt Open (ETC Board is able to Communicate with CPU)
fFFfFFfF
OS Start (Task Management Start)
fFFFffff
36
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
3-1-4
2242063
LED Indications (continued)

Table 32
ETC Board LED Status (Initializing & StartingUp) (continued)

Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Special ETC Data is being Set
fFFFfffF
ETC Preparation End/Waiting for Execute command from CPU
fFFFffFf
Execute command Received from CPU
fFFFFfff
Informing CPU of Execute Command
fFFFFffF
Requesting I/F Manager Loading from CPU
fFFFFfFf
I/F Manager Loading is being Executed
fFFFFfFF
I/F Manager Loading End
fFFFFFff
I/F Manager Start
fFFFFFfF
Initialize Process Completed on ROM
fFFFFFFF
Necessary Program is being loaded from CPU
Ffffffff
ETC Application Program Management Start
FffFffff
37
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
3-1-5
2242063
Error Code
Refer to the following Error Code Description when the ETC fails during the powerup sequence.
Table 33
ETC Board Exception LED Status

Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ROM Level does not match Program Level
FfFfFffF
CPU Packet Writing Error
FfFfFfFF
CPU Packet Transmit error
FfFfFFff
Work Area is not Sufficient
FfFfFFfF
File Read Error
FfFfFFFf
Anything else Fatal Error
FfFfFFFF
IP Address for Myself is not Set
FfFFffff
Ethernet Address is not Set
FfFFfffF
LANCE Initiate Error
FfFFffFf
Initial Error of Memory for LANCE
FfFFffFF
LANCE Initial Timeout
FfFFfFff
Bus Error
FFfFffff
Address Error
FFfFfffF
Breach Command
FFfFffFf
Division by Zero
FFfFffFF
CHK/CHK2 Command
FFfFfFff
TRAPcc/TRAPV Command
FFfFfFfF
Privilege Breach
FFfFfFFf
Execute Trace on Invalid Condition
FFfFfFFF
Line 1010 Emulator
FFfFFfff
Line 1111 Emulator
FFfFFffF
Hardware Break Point on Invalid Condition
FFfFFfFf
Processor Protocol Breach
FFfFFfFF
Format Error
FFfFFFff
InInitial Interrupt
FFfFFFfF
Standby RAM Destroyed/ETC Special Data is not Set
FFfFFFFf
38
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
3-1-5
2242063
Error Code (continued)

Table 33
ETC Board Exception LED Status (continued)

Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SPRIUS Interrupt (Hardware Invalid)
FFFfffff
Interrupt to Undefined Auto Vector
FFFfffff
Undefined Exception Occurrence (Vector 1 or 1)
FFFfFfff
Undefined Exception Occurrence (Vector 16 23)
FFFfFffF
FFFfFfFf
FFFfFfFF
FFFfFFff
Undefined Exception Occurrence (Except Above)
FFFfFFFF
Undefined TRAP Occurrence
FFFFffff
Table 34
ETC Board Current LED Status

LED Status
Description
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Fatal Hardware Error
Ffffffff
Fatal Software Error
fFffffff
ETC is Currently Stopped by Fatal Error
ffFfffff
Waiting for Response Packet from CPU
fffFffff
Waiting for ACK from System Bus
ffffFfff
Interrupt from LANCE is Currently Managed
fffffFff
PANIC in TCP/IP Driver
ffffffFf
Idling Task is Currently Executed (Flashing)
fffffff~
F : Illuminate
39
~ : Flashing
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
3-2
2242063
ETC OFFLINE TEST

Note
Verify that no communication is performed on the Ethernet before entering this test. If this test is run
whit systems communicated, the communication data will be destroyed.
3-2-1
General
The Offline test for the ETC Board is provided on the ROM on the ETC Board. The Offline tests are interactive ones,
requiring an external display terminal.
The ETC test proceedings or error information occurred during the test execution are shown on the ETC status LEDs
as well as on the terminal display. The Status LEDs turn off when all the Offline tests have been finished without an
error.
3-2-2
Required hardware
D ETC Assy
D AUI Cable
D Transceiver
D Display Terminal
Note
If the ETC board is not connected to the transceiver of the Ethernet cable via the AUI cable, set the
Ethernet loop back test disable on the operation mode selection screen. See illustration 35.
310
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
3-2-3
2242063
Switch Setting
Set the Dip switch on the ETC Assy (location S8A) as required according to the following:
D SW8A Power On Test Perform/Skip. OffLine test setting.
Illustration 34
ETC Dip Switch Setting (OffLine Test)

ON
1 2 3 4
1
0
B2 : OffLine Test:
0 Not perform test
1 Perform test
B3 : Power On Test:
0 Perform test
1 Skip test
Note
The Dip switch setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing the
Dip switch setting during test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want to change
the parameters, first set the Dip switch accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start the test.
311
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
3-2-4
2242063
External display Terminal
Refer to Section 2-1-2, External Display Terminal, in this Operator Console tab.
3-2-5
OffLine Test Operation
1.
Verify that the Dip switch (SW8A) on the ETC board is set to $C or $4 position (OffLine Test ON).
2.
Connect the external display terminal to the CN4 of the ETC Board.
3.
Verify that no communication is performed on the Ethernet.
4.
Pull the reset switch of the Operator Console. (The following displays on the external display terminal.)
5.
Enternet the appropriate values for the operation mode, referring to the following table. Entries will be performed
in the shaded region of the illustration below.
Illustration 35
Operation Mode Selection
MC68332 initialization completed.

ETC Board initialization completed......12.256MByte available.
entering to OFFLINE test mode.....

ETC (Ethernet Controller interface) OFFLINE TEST v.0.00

Select test_execution mode.
([0]:sequential mode or [1]:separate mode):[0]= 0 or 1
Select error_indication mode.
([0]:stop on error or [1]:non_stop on error):[0]= 0 or 1
Select test_skip mode.
([0]:external loop back test >[0]:enable or [1]:disable):[0]= 0 or 1
Item
Entered Number
0
Test Execution Mode
All tests are performed.
Only selected tests are performed.
Error Indication Mode
When error occurs, error information is displayed and the test is terminated.
When error occurs, error information is

displayed, but the test proceeds.
Test Skip Mode
External loop back test can be performed.
External loop back test is skipped.
Note
D Normally select 0 to all entry items.
D when the AUI cable is not connected to the ETC board, always select 1 in response to Select test_skip
mode.
312
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
3-2-5
6.
2242063
OffLine Test Operation (continued)
The test menu screen appears on the terminal. Always select 0 to perform all OffLine tests in response to
Select Test Number.
MENU
0=Internal bus/bus error test
0=Control/Status register test
.
.
Select test number:0 CR
The OffLine test is performed automatically. It takes approximately 30 minutes to complete all tests. For each test
time and LED status, see the following:
Test Item
LED Status
Test Time (min.)
0 : Internal bus/bus error test
$02 $06
1 : Control/Status register test
$10 $14
2 : SRAM write/verify test
$07 $0B
3 : DRAM write/verify test
$15 $17
$18
5 : LANCE diagnostic test
$19 $1C
6 : Internal bus arbitration test
$20 $21
4 : dual port RAM write/verify test
Note : At the moment ETC OffLine Test is executed, LED status is $39.
Note
To terminate the OffLine test during execution, press the <C> key while holding the <Control> key.
313
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
3-3
2242063
ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION
This test is performed to check if the Ethernet address data backuped by the internal battery to the ETC board is
stored without error. If data is destroyed, first check if the internal battery has been consumed. Weak battery can not
back up the Ethernet data into the RAM. (Normally for 5 to 10 years, the internal battery can be used without replacement.)
1.
Connect the external terminal display to the CN4 of the ETC board.
2.
Set the Dip switch (location:S6A) to the $4 position.
ON
1
S6A
1 2 3 4
3.
Pull the reset switch of the Operator Console.

The ETC PowerOn test is executed. After approximately 30 seconds, the status LEDs are displayed as follows:
15
4.
8 7
ETC initial setting screen appears on the terminal. Check if each item is set to the proper value according to the
Table below.
Entry Example
Item
Manufactured Data
1994/03/03
Manufactured Time
12:34
Serial Number
0012 (Enter the same number as the ETC board.)
Ethernet Address
OC (Enter the number that decodes the serial number (decimal) into the hexa
decimal.)
5.
Enter y in response to Are you sure (y/n)? to verify that the ETC board initial setting is properly done.
6.
Verify that the ETC status LEDs are displayed as follows:

15
8 7
314
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 4 LED DESCRIPTION

The LEDs on circuit boars installed on the nest chassis indicate various status information.
The information in this section can be a help o identify failures occurred on boards.
4-1
CPW
TEST
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RESET
INTERRUPT
HALT
FAIL
These LEDs show the status during the PowerOn Test

and OffLine Test.
Refer to PON test to see more details.
41
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
4-2
2242063
IPU2
Status
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Status LED
After the system starts up with no errors, bit 1 LED only
flashes at interval of approx. 1 second. Bit 0 7 LEDs are
normally extinguished.
When performing reconstruction, bit 2 LED only is lit ON.
Others are normally extinguished.
42
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
4-3
2242063
DISP
OVL
IMG
FB1
DB1
VSYNC
SBUS
DMA
IOBUS
OVL (Overlay)
It is lit ON when OVL screen is ON.
(OVL screen is controlled by OVL ON bit of DISPLAY CONTROL REG.)
IMG (Image)
It is lit ON when IFB (Image Frame Buffer) screen is ON.
(IFB screen is controlled by IMG ON bit of DISPLAY CONTROL REG.)
FB1 (Frame Buffer 1)
It is lit ON when FM1 (Frame Memory 1) displays.
(FM0/FM1 selection is controlled by IMG bit of DISPLAY IMG REG.)
DB1 (DAS Buffer 1)
It is lit ON when BUF1 is connected to IO BUs.
(BUF0/BUF1 selection to connect IO BUS is controlled by BUF bit of
BUF REG.)
VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization)
It is lit ON during VSYNC.
SBUS (System Bus)
It is lit ON during access from SYSTEM BUS.
DMA (Direct Memory Access)
It is lit ON during DMA to ACRTC.
IO BUS
It is lit ON during access from IO BUS.
43
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
4-4
2242063
MISC
Status LED
These LEDs indicate status of Multi Format Camera.
LED
MFC Status
Test
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
$00
$02
$03
$04
$05
$06
$07
$08
$09
$0A
$0B
$0C
$0D
$0E
$0F
$10
$11
$16
$17
$1B
$1C
$1D
$1F
MFC Not Ready

Rec. Mag. is Not Installed
Sup. Mag. is Not Installed
Film Empty or Sup. Mag. Shutter is Not Open
Waiting Supply Command
Waiting Expose Command
CRT Positioning
Exposing
Expose n Complete
Resetting
Supply Error
Receive error
RAM Check Error 2000H
RAM Check Error 3000H
7 Seg. No Light (Flashing)
Developper Not Ready
Rec. Mag. Full
Film Overlap Error
Lens Positioning Error
Communication Error (Send)
Video Signal Error
Communication Error (Receive)
Copy Mode (SSI Only)
(Not Used)
ROM SUM Check:
NO: Error
OFF:No Error
(Not Used)
Communication Program:
BLINK : Program Runs.
ON or OFF: Program does Not Run.
44
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
4-5
2242063
ISC
DSR (DTR) (Data Set Ready or Data Terminal Ready):

It is lit ON when DSR signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or DTR signal is received on DCE
(Data Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem).
For Serial Channel 0

DSR (DTR)
DCD
RI
(Not Used)
DCD (Data Carrier Detected):

It is lit ON when DCD signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or DCD signal is sent on DCE (Data
Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem).
RI (Ringing Indicator):
It is lit ON when RI signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or RI signal is sent on DCE (Data
Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem)
RST (Reset):
It is lit ON when the system is reset or the register reset on the
ISC board is performed.
RST
DMA
DTE0
DTE1
For Serial Channel 1

DSR (DTR)
DCD
RI
(Not Used)
DMA (Direct Memory Access Busy):

It is lit ON when SCA (Serial Communication Adapter) occupy
on board BUS for DMA.
DTE0 (CH0: Data Terminal Ready):
It is lit ON when the serial channel 0 is set as DTE (i.e. Terminal) using Dip switch.
DTE1 (CH1: Data terminal Ready):
It is lit ON when the serial channel 1 is set as DTE (i.e. Terminal) using Dip switch.
DSR (DTR) (Data Set Ready or Data Terminal Ready):
It is lit ON when DSR signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or DTR signal is received on DCE
(Data Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem).
DCD (Data Carrier Detected):
It is lit ON when DCD signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or DCD signal is sent on DCE (Data
Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem).
RI (Ringing Indicator):
It is lit ON when RI signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or RI signal is sent on DCE (Data
Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem)
45
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
4-6
2242063
ODC2 (OPTION)
Status
Status LED
These indicate, the status of ODC2 test specified by test SW on ODC2.
(Not Used)
FULL
EMP
CRC
CEN
BEN
FULL, EMP
These LED indicate the status of the FIFO buffer.
D FULL is lit ON when the FIFO is full.
D EMP is lit ON when the FIFO is empty.
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
It is lit ON when CRC error occurs during reading data.
CEN (CRC Enable)
It is lit ON when CRC is generated during writing data or when CRC is
checked during reading data.
BEN (Buffer Enable)
It is lit ON during transferring 512 byte data.
46
OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0
4-7
2242063
MTC (OPTION)
FULL
HALF
EMP
(Not Used)
INTR
DMA
(Not Used)
FAIL
FULL, HALF, EMP

These indicate number of data stored in 8kbyte FIFO One
of Three is lit ON according to the followings.
FULL : 8Kbyte
HALF : 4K 8Kbyte
EMP : 0 byte
INTR (Interrupt)
It is lit ON when interruption to MPU occurs.
(e.g., DMA completion, command packet receipt, bus error)
DMA (Direct Memory Access)
It is lit ON during DMA on MTC.
FAIL (Device Fail)
It is lit ON when MT unit power is turned off or control cable
is not connected.
T3
2
1
0
T3 0 (Test Status)
Not used. Normally all LEDs are extinguished.
47
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
4-8
2242063
ETC (OPTION)
Refer to Section 3. ETC Board Test.
48
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2242063
APPENDIX A CREATING A CRASH SAVE DISKETTE

Insert the BOOT diskette into the floppy disk drive.
2.
Set the boot select switch on CPW board as follows:
3.
Pull the system reset switch.
4.
Initialize the diskette as follows:
1 2 3 4
ON
1.
a. Enter VINITS at keyboard.

Note
VINITS, not VINIT, command must be entered.
b. Remove the BOOT diskette, and insert a scratch diskette into the floppy disk drive.
Do not forget to set the write protect tab to the OFF position. (Write enable the scratch floppy.)
c. Enter parameters for diskette initialize.
> VINITS CR
WHAT DEVICE (MAX. 4 CHARA.) ? FD00 CR (FD Device Name)
FLEXIBLE DISK: 2DENSITY 2SIDED
** TOTAL sector: 3991 **
VOLUME NAME: FD00
DESCRIPTION: gggggggggggggggggggg
DO YOU WANT TO FORMAT DISK (Y/N/Q) ? Y CR
** FORMATTING! **
** FORMATTED OK! **
DO YOU WANT TO VALIDATE SECTORS (Y/N/Q) ? N CR
DO YOU WANT TO INITIALIZE DISK (Y/N/Q) ? Y CR (FD Initialize Request)
VOLUME NAME (MAX. 4 CHARA.) ? FDMP CR
(Volume Name)
USER NUMBER ? 0 CR
(User No.)
DESCRIPTION (MAX. 20 CHARA.) ? CRASH SAVE AREA CR
DO YOU WANT IPLT LOADING (Y/N/Q) ? N CR
DO YOU WANT SYSTEM DUMP AREA (Y/N/Q/) ? Y CR (Dump File Allocate Request)
WHAT FILE NAME (MAX. 8 CHARA.) ? DUMP CR
(Dump File Name)
HOW MANY SECTORS (DECIMAL) ? 8 CR
** INITIALIZING ! **
** INITIALIZED: OK ! **
**** VINITS DONE ****
VINITS: TERMINATED
>
A1
OPERATOR CONSOLE

blank
2242063
A2
OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0
2242063
TABLE / GANTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 1 LED AND SWITCH DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1
11
LED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
TGP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2
Gantry Servo Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAGNOSTICS DIP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
12
14
SECTION 2 TGP POWERON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
1-2
2-1
2-2
GANTRY PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
25
SECTION 3 TGP OFFLINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
3-1
TABLE PROCESSOR OFFLINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-1
I/O Port Status Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2
Sequential Function Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3
I/O Port Bit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4
Table Processor Bit Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GANTRY PROCESSOR OFFLINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1
I/O Port Status Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2
Sequential Function Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3
I/O Port Bit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-4
Gantry Processor Bit Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
32
37
310
312
313
313
319
322
324
SECTION 4 SERVO AMP. AND SERVO MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
3-2
4-1
4-2
SERVO ALARM AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1-1
Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2
Servo Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3
Resetting the Servo Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIGNAL CHECK POINT OF SERVO AMP. (P9153SF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
41
43
45
46
TABLE/GANTRY

blank
2242063
ii
TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 1 LED AND SWITCH DESCRIPTIONS
1-1
LED DESCRIPTION
1-1-1
TGP Board
The TGP board has 16 Status LEDs.

ERRA
Gantry Processor detected an error, or Gantry Processor is in an error condition.

This LED lights when error(s) occurred in the Gantry Processor System.
(e.g.) D RAM Check Error
D ROM Check Error
D Gantry Azimuth Initialize Error
Refer to the TGP Diagnostics Section of this manual.
LOOPA
Indicates that the interval timer function of the Gantry Processor is operating. Flashes ON and OFF
for every second cycle during normal Gantry Processor operation.
REQA
The Gantry Processor is executing a program requested by the Scan Processor (CPW).
MNLA
Lights up while the Gantry Processor executing a manual mode Program.
ERRB
Table Processor detected an error, or Table Processor in sin an error condition.

This LED lights when error(s) occur in the Table Processor System.
(e.g.) D RAM Check Error
D ROM check Error
D MISC Table Processor Serial communication error
Refer to TGP Diagnostics Section of this manual.
LOOPB
Indicates that the interval timer function of the Table Processor is operating. Flashes ON and OFF
for every second cycle during normal Table Processor operation.
REQB
The Table Processor is executing a program requested by the Scan Processor.
MNLB
Lights up while the Table Processor executing a manual mode Program.
HVON
Lights up when the TGP outputs the HV ON signal to the Xray Generator.
DTRIG
It indicates the DAS trigger while in DAS ENABLE mode.
SVE
Lights up while the servo Amp is enabled.
SVALM
Lights up when the servo Alarm is detected.
GLIMT
Lights up when the Gantry Azimuth Limit switch is actuated.

(or) Cable check switch in the Gantry Takeup is actuated.
TBLSTOP
Lights up when the TGP loses control of the cradle In/Out operation.
CCWR
Lights up when the Gantry Azimuth Rest Position sensor detects CCW rest position.
CWR
Lights up when the Gantry Azimuth Rest Position sensor detects CW rest position.
11
TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0
1-1-2
2242063
Gantry Servo Amp.
The Gantry Servo Amp. contains a 7 segment LED which indicates Servo Amp. failure modes.
For Servo Amp. 2198990

SVOFF
Indicates that Servomechanism is OFF.
SVON
Indicates normal control with Servomechanism ON.
CUR
Indicates overcurrent of output circuit.
LOAD
Indicates motor overload.
SPEED
Indicates motor overspeed.
TEMP
Indicates abnormal driver temperature.
ECD
Indicates open circuit for Encoder signal.
PS
Indicates abnormal power supply board.
PWR
Indicates that power for motor drive is OFF.
CPU
Indicates uncontrollable CPU
12
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
1-1-2
2242063
Gantry Servo Amp. (continued)
For Servo Amp. P9153SF

O.C
OVER CURRENT:
Indicates over current in output circuit
O.L
OVER LOAD:
Indicates motor over load
O.H
OVER HEAT:
Indicates overheating of the Power Transistor
F.E
CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF:

Indicates that the input circuit breaker has been tripped
P.E
DYNAMIC BREAKER FUNCTION FAIL:

Indicates dynamic break function failure.
S.E
SPEED ERROR:
Indicates excessive motor speed (120% of maximum speed)
V.E
VOLTAGE ERROR (POWER FAIL):

Indicates input voltage failure (85% or less than normal operational voltage)
C.E
COMMUTATION ERROR:
Indicates commutation signal failure
(No Display)
Power is not applied or Normal operating status
The Servo Amp. also contains 5 LEDs which indicate the following conditions as shown in Table 11.
Table 11
Servo Amp. LED
LED
Color
Description
RGSO
Green
Indicates that Servo Amp. is ready to operate when lit.
R.S
Green
Not used for CT Sytec/Sytec i series.

Indicates external reset of Servo Amp.
+15
Green
Indicates that +15V power is OK when lit.
15
Green
Indicates that 15V power is OK when lit.
C.L (T.H)
Green
Not used for CT Sytec/Sytec i series.

Indicates that external current limit or torque hold operation is working.
13
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
1-2
2242063
DIAGNOSTICS DIP SWITCH
Tables 12 and 13 show the functions of the TGP DIAG. Dip switches.
Table 12
Diag. Dip Switch (Gantry Processor)
Switch No.
Description
S1
ON : Disables Aperture Check.
S2
ON : Disables Gantry Rotation Initialize.
S3
ON : Measure the Gantry rotation Time in OFF LINE TEST #401.
S4
Gantry MID speed select

OFF
: MID = 2.7 sec/rev
ON
: MID = 3.6 sec/rev
S5
ON : Positioning Light 0/270 degree mode
S6
Gantry
Position
Light Switch is Pressed Once
Light Switch is Pressed Twice
Light ON or OFF (toggle)
Gantry rotates to 270 position,

then Light is lit ON.
270
Light ON or OFF (toggle)
Gantry returns to 0 position,

then Light is lit ON
Other than
0 and 270
Gantry returns to 0 position,

Gantry rotates to 270 position,

Gantry Processor OFF LINE TEST selection.
S7
S8
Disables Gantry Processor ROM Check.

Disables Gantry Processor Watchdog Timer function.
Table 13
Diag. Dip Switch (Table Processor)
Switch No.
Description
S9
Disables Scan Status Check.

Disables Automatic 150mm Table height stop.
Disables Automatic zero degree tilt stop.
S10
Not Used.
S11
Disables the interlock function for Table up/down and Gantry Tilt.
S12
ON : Cradle IN limit short mode.
S13
OFF : CT Sytec mode.
S14
Table Processor OFF LINE TEST selection.
S15
S16
Disables Table Processor ROM check.

Disables Table Processor watchdog timer function.
14
TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 2 TGP POWERON TEST

The TGP contains two Micro Processors. (i.e., Gantry Processor and Table Processor)
Theses processors execute the following programs independently power is applied or reset occurs.
2-1
D Gantry Processor
RAM Check
ROM Check
Gantry Azimuth Rotation Check and Gantry Azimuth Initialize.
D Table Processor
RAM Check
ROM Check
Display Check
GANTRY PROCESSOR
RAM Check
The Gantry Processor performs memory READ/WRITE response checks for the micro processor internal RAM and
external RAM.
D PD78310 internal RAM
ADDRESS FE00 FEEF
D RAM (16S45)
ADDRESS C000 C7FF
This RAM Check is executed when power is applied or reset occurs.
If the Gantry Processor detects and error, ii displays the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRA, LOOPA, REQA and MNLA LESs ON.
If the test passes, LOOPA LED blinks.
21
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
2-1
2242063
GANTRY PROCESSOR (continued)
ROM Check
The Gantry Processor performs a ROM data Sum Check after the RAM Check.
D Sum Check Address
ADDRESS 0 BFFF (ROM Sum data is in address 00FF.)
If the Gantry Processor detects an error, it indicates the error on the LEDs as follows:
ERRA, REQA and MNLA LEDs ON.
If successful, LOOPA LED blinks.
Gantry Rotation Check and Initialize
The Gantry Processor performs the Gantry Rotation Check and azimuth position initialization after completion of the
ROM Check. The following chart shows initializing operations:
Illustration 21
CCW Rest Area
Home
0
2
End of CCW Rest Area

10 + 5
33
CCW Rest Area
22
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
2-1
2242063

Illustration 22
Gantry Initialize Operation

START
Check TGP Manual

Switch Status
Indicates Status on LEDs

ERRA and LOOPA Alternate
ON and OFF.
MNL
SYS tor MNL

Position ?
SYS
Check Azimuth
Position
NO
CCW Rest
Area ?
YES
2
Rotate Gantry to
CCW Direction
1
Rotate Gantry to
CW Direction
Initialize Azimuth
Position Counter by
G.Pulse.
Out of CCW
Rest Area ?
3
Stop Gantry at 33
Position
NO
YES
Stop Gantry Rotation at 10
Rotate Gantry to
CW Direction
Stop Gantry at
HOME (0)
23
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
2-1
2242063
If the Gantry Processor detects an error during the Rotation check and Initialization, the Gantry Processor Stops
Gantry rotation and displays an error via the LEDs and the Gantry processor hangs up (stops operations).
Table 21
Error Lists and LED Status

LED Status
Error List
ERRA
SVALM
GLIMT
Servo Alarm
ON
ON
Gantry Limit Position Error (or) Cable Check switch Error
ON
ON
Gantry Not Rotating
ON
Gantry Over Speed
ON
33 degree Position Check Error
ON
G.Pulse Not Detected during Rotation to 33 degree Position
ON
Gantry did not Reach Home within 10sec of CW Rotation Toward

the Home Position
ON
24
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
2-2
2242063
TABLE PROCESSOR
RAM Check
The Table Micro Processor performs a memory READ/WRITE response check on the micro processor internal RAM
and external RAM.
D PD78310 internal RAM
ADDRESS FE00 FEEF
D RAM (16S45)
ADDRESS C000 C7FF
This RAM Check is executed when power is applied or reset occurs.
If the Table Processor detects an error, if displays the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRB, LOOPB REQB and MNLB LEDs ON
If successful, LOOPB LED blinks.
ROM Check
The Table Processor performs a ROM data Sum Check after the RAM Check.
D Sum Check Address 0 3FFF (ROM Sum data is in 00FF)
If the Table Processor detects an error, it displays the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRB, REQB and MNLB LEDs ON
If successful, LOOPB LED blinds.
25
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
2-2
2242063
TABLE PROCESSOR (continued)
Display Check
The Table Processor performs the display check program after the ROM Check.
Table 22 lists the Gantry Panel Switch and Gantry display LED display check patterns.
Table 22
Gantry Display Check Pattern

Gantry Display
Ptn
FWD
BWD
D8
D7
D6
Posn
D3
D2
D1
Up
Down
In
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
9
10
D4
D5
Hgh
Gantry Switch
11
26
TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 3 TGP OFFLINE TEST
3-1
TABLE PROCESSOR OFFLINE TEST
The TGP Assembly contains two micro processor system. (i.e., Gantry Processor and Table Processor)
Theses Processor systems can execute the OFFLINE programs used for subsystem Adjustment, Functional Check
and Diagnostics.
Each Processor holds test programs in its own PROM. Execute each Processors OFFLINE TEST program independently with the DIAG switches and test switches.
The Micro Processor displays the test results and/or error on the Gantry Display Panel, so it requires a normally operating TABLE Processor display function. Execute the OFFLINE TEST program after successful completion of the
TABLE PROCESSOR DISPLAY TEST.
The OFFLINE TEST program performs three operations:
D Real Time Monitor Mode (I/O Status Check)
Use this mode to monitor Table /Gantry subsystem position information.
[Cradle Position, Table height, Tilt Angle (Table Processor) and Azimuth Position (Gantry Processor)] and
Status of Micro Processors I/O ports.
D Response Test Mode (Sequential function Test)
Micro Processor performs I/O port response check, internal timer function check, internal pulse generator
function check, cradle drive operation check (Table Processor) and Collimator drive operation check
(Gantry Processor).
D Simulate Test Mode (I/O Port Bit Check Tool)
Use this test mode to manipulate output port bits selected by test switches.
Use the Gantry Panel Switches to set bit data for the Table Processor test. Use the TGP manual switches
to set bit data for Gantry Processor Test.
31
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-1-1
1.
2242063
I/O Port Status Check
Set S14 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ON position.

Press the Reset wwitch of the TGP Board, the Gantry Display shows the Test Number (000) and cradle position
value in decimal form.
Example Value
2.
To select the test program, press the TEST switch on TGP Board. The Test Number increases each time you
press the test switch until it reaches
The Test Number loops back to
after
. (i.e., Loop 000 013)
Use Test Number 000 002 to monitor the CRADLE POSITION, TABLE HEIGHT and TILT ANGLE.
(i.e., AD CONVERTER VALUE)
Use Test Number 003 011 to monitor I/O PORT STATUS.
Use Test Number 012 and 013 to monitor ERROR CODE and ROM SUM DATA of ROM Check.
Table 31 33 shows the bit assignment of the I/O port.
3.
To exit this Test Mode: Move S14 to OFF position, then press RESET switch.
Illustration 31
Diag. Swishes
Reset
CPU
Test A
CPU
Test B
H0
HG
P0
PG
T0
TG
S1
S9
ON
ON
OFF
S16
OFF
Table Processor
Diag. Switch
S8
Gantry Processor
Diag. Switch
32
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-1-1
2242063
I/O Port Status Check (continued)

Table 31
Test Number
000
Table Processor I/O Port Status Check

Test
CRADLE POSITION
Display
D Zero Position; Cradle Mechanical Out limit.
Display Cradle Absolute D 0.5mm/digit. (e.g.) Display 0100 50mm away from Zero Position
Position in decimal form.
CRADLE LIMIT POSITION
In Limit
Out Limit
10
(5mm)
3050
(1525mm)
SCANNABLE RANGE
3050
(1525mm)
10
(5mm)
D If the cradle is within the range of 0 30 (0mm 15mm),

the Table can be lowered to 600mm.
001
D Zero Position ; Table height 605mm form ISO center.

(Mechanical lowest position from ISO center is 610mm)
Display Table Height in
D 0.5mm/digit. (e.g.) Display 0010 Table height 600mm
decimal form.
Display 1210 Table Height 0mm
TABLE HEIGHT
D Up direction (+)
002
TILT ANGLE
D Zero Position ; Tilt FWD 25.5.
Display Tilt Angle in deci- D 0.1/digit. (e.g.)

mal.
Display 0005 FWD25

Display 0255 0
Display 0505 BWD 25
D BWD direction (+)
33
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-1-1
2242063
Table 31
Table Processor I/O Port Status Check (continued)
Test Number
003
Description
Display Gantry Panel Switch Status and foot Switch Status.
Address
004
FFB4
Display Gantry Panel Switch Status and OC Panel Switch Status.

Address
FFB5
005
Display Output Port Status of Table Processor PORT0.
006
Display Input Port Status of Table Processor PORT1 in complement number.
007
Display Input/Output Port Status of Table Processor PORT2.
008
Display Input/Output Port Status of Table Processor PORT3.
009
Display Scan Control Port Status.

Address
FFB0
010
Display status of Table Processor Status LED Control Port.

Address
011
Display Status of ADC Control and Gantry Panel LED Control Port.
Address
012
FFB1
FFB2
Display Error Code while ERRB LED ON.

on condition that TABLE PROCESSOR works properly
(i.e.) LOOPG LED ALTERNATES ON, OFF
Bit Assignments is :
Bit 7
: Micro Processor hungup
013
Bit 6
: Not Used
Bit 5
: Not Used
Bit 4
: Not Used
Bit 3
: Communication Error TG OC (No ACK/NAC Response from OC.)
Bit 2
: Communication Error TG OC (Table Processor has sent NAC 3 times.)
Bit 1
: Communication Error (Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready.)
Bit 0
: Communication Error (Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready

when ACK/NAC XMT is requested.)
Display ROM SUM Check Data

is displayed when ROM SUM Check is completed successfully.
Note:
ACK
NAC
XMT
: Acknowledge
: NonAcknowledge
: Transmission
34
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-1-1
2242063
Table 32
Index
Bit Assignment of I/O Port

Device Data Bit
Description
U3F
D7 : FAST
Gantry Panel Switch Status D6 : ZERO
D5 : MTS
and OC Panel Switch Status
D4 : POSI
(FFB4)
D3 : HEIGHT
D2 : RANGE
D1 : SCAN
D0 :
D7=1 ; FAST switch is depressed

D6=1 ; ZERO switch is depressed
D5=1 ; Move to Scan switch is depressed
D4=1 ; Positioning Light ON switch is depressed
D3=1 ; Height switch is depressed
D2=1 ; Range switch is depressed
D1=1 ; Scan set switch on OC Panel is depressed
Not Used
U3E
D7 : IN
Gantry Panel Switch Status D6 : OUT
D5 : UPR
and Foot Switch Status
D4 : DNR
(FFB3)
D3 : FWDR
D2 : BWDR
D1 : FUPR
D0 : FDNR
D7=1
D6=1
D5=1
D4=1
D3=1
D2=1
D1=1
D0=1
RD5B
RD4B
U3J
D7 :
ADC Control and Gantry Panel D6 :
D5 : ADSEL 1
Switch LED Control
D4 : ADSEL 0
(FFB2)
WR2B
D3 :
D2 : DNLED
D1 : UPLED
D0 : INLED
U5Q
D7 : ERR.B
Processor (B) Status LED D6 : LOOP.B
D5 : OCREQ.B
Control
D4 : MNL.B
(FFB1)
D3 :
D2 :
D1 :
D0 :
WR1B
U7E
D7 :
Scan Control (by Table Proces- D6 : T.SCAN
D5 : T.DENA
sor)
D4 : THVON
(FFB0)
D3 :
D2 :
D1 :
D0 : T.OFFSET
WR0B
; IN switch is depressed
; OUT switch is depressed
; UP switch is depressed
; DOWN switch is depressed
; FORWARD switch is depressed
; BACKWARD switch is depressed
; Foot switch; UP is depressed
; Foot switch; DOWN is depressed
Not Used
Not Used
ADC Input Selection
D5
D4
0
0
0
1
Height Position
1
1
Tilt
Not Used
Gantry Panel SW D2=1 ; DOWN LED ON
Gantry Panel SW D1=1 ; UP LED ON
Gantry Panel SW D0=1 ; IN LED ON
Control LED ON/OFF
Not Used
Not Used
Scan Mode Control
D6=1 ; Table scan
DAS Control
D5=1 ; Table Processor DAS Enable
HV ON Control
D4=1 ; HV ON by Table Processor
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
DAS Control ; Offset Data Collection Mode
D0=1 ; Offset Data Collection by Table Processor
35
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-1-1
2242063

Table 33
Bit assignment of Processor Port
Port
P0
(OUT)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
(IN)
Bit 7 :
:
Bit 0 :
Port 0
P1
Bit
Port 1
P2
Port 2
P3
Port 3
Note
INTR
SIO
PLS
COUNTER
: INTREQ A
:
: BWDE
: FWDE
: DNE
: UPE
: TBLDRV
: IN
Test
Switch
Data
Description
Interrupt Request to Gantry Processor
Not Used
Bit 5 = 1 ; Tilt Backward Enable
Bit 4 = 1 ; Tilt Forward Enable
Bit 3 = 1 ; Table Down Enable
Bit 2 = 1 ; Table Up Enable
Bit 1 = 1 ; Cradle Drive
Bit 0 = 1 ; Cradle IN, Bit 0 = 0 ; Cradle OUT
Test Switch S9 S16 Status
Bit 0 7 ; 0 = Switch ON
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
:
: GSCAN
: OTCOM
: TOCOM
: SCANRST
: COMINT
: ADINT
: TESTB
Not Used
(IN) Bit 6 = 1 ; Gantry Scan Mode
(SIO) Serial Communication OC Table Processor
(SIO) Serial Communication Table Processor OC
(INTR IN) Bit 3 = 1 ; Scan End: Interrupt from 8253 (View Control Counter)
(INTR IN) Bit 2 = 1 ; Communication Interrupt from Gantry P
(INTR IN) Bit 1 = 1 ; Interrupt from ADC
(INTR IN) Bit 0 = 1 ; Test Switch Interrupt
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
: TTRG
: TBLPLS
: TBLERR
: UNLATCH
: OUTDRV
: INDRV
: OUTPLS
: INPLS
(PLS OUT)
(PLS OUT)
(IN)
(IN)
(COUNTER)
(COUNTER)
(COUNTER)
(COUNTER)
Table Processor DAS Trigger

Cradle drive Pulse
Table Error
Bit5 = 1 ; Cradle Error
Cradle Unlatch Bit4 = 1 ; Cradle Unlatch
Cradle Out
Cradle In
Cradle Encoder Pulse, Cradle Out
Cradle Encoder Pulse, Cradle In
: Interrupt
: Serial InputOutput
: Pulse
: Input to Counter
36
TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0
3-1-2
2242063
Sequential Function Test
In this test, Table Processor sequences through the following tests:

D Table Processor I/O Port Read/Write Response Test
D Table Processor Internal Counter Function Test
D Table Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function Test
D Cradle In/Out drive Operation Test
When the Table Processor detects an error, it displays an error code on the Gantry Display.
1.
Move the cradle approximately 500mm from the out limit position.
2.
Set S15 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ON position.
3.
Press the Reset switch of the TGP Board,

The Gantry Display shows the Test Number (100) and cradle position value in decimal form.
4.
Press TEST B switch on the TGP board to start test.

The Gantry Display shows the following when all tests complete successfully.
Table 34 shows the error code for each test.

5.
37
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-1-2
2242063
Sequential Function Test (continued)

Table 34
Test
Number
100
|
147
Table Processor Sequential Function Test

Test
Description
I/O Port
D Read/Write Response Check for the I/O Port of the Table Processor.
Response Check D Indicate Test Number and Bit Number on the Gantry Display if error
detected.
(i.e.)
D Test Number
D Show Bit4
100
|
107
110
|
117
120
|
127
140
|
147
WR0B
Address FFB0
Read Data of Processor in

decimal number
: Scan Control Port
I/O Port
Read/Write Response Check, U4Q and U4R on the TGP board.
Response Check Refer to Table 32 of this section for Bit Assignment.
WR1B
Address FFB1
: Status LED Control Port
I/O Port
Read/Write Response Check, U5Q and U5R on the TGP board.
WR2B
Address FFB2
: ADC and Gantry Panel LED Control Port
I/O Port
Read/Write Response Check, U3H and U5J on the TGP board.
P0
Table Processor I/O Port, P0 Read/Write Response Check.
I/O Port
response Check
Refer to Table 33 of this section for Bit Assignment.
160
Time Base
Counter Check
D Check the Table Processor Internal Time Base Counter Function

D Interval Timer repeat period 10.9msec.
D Error Indication
161
DAS Trigger
Pulse Generator
&
DAS Trigger
Counter Function
Check
D Check Table Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function.

D Check 8253 Timer Function
D Pulse Generator generates DAS trigger and outputs to Timer 8253 from pin 42.
D Timer 8253 generates interrupt (INTE 2) after it counts 64 DAS trigger pulse.
D If Timer 8253 does not generate INTE 2 interrupt, Table Processor indicates error.
D Error Indication
38
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-1-2
2242063

Table 34
Test
Number
170
Table Processor Sequential Function Test (continued)
Test
Description
Error
Cradle Drive
D Test 170 171 are done through the following Cradle Operation
Pulse Generator Check.
and
(1) Set 3 seconds on to Watch dog Timer.
Cradle Encoder
(2) Move Cradle 20mm IN.
Check
(3) Check Cradle position.
If cradle does not reach to 20mm position within 3 second,
Table processor indicates error on the Gantry Display.
170
&
171
172
Cradle Position
Encoder Pulse
Counter
Functional
Check
Cradle Drive
Uncontrolled
Fail Detection
Circuit Check
(4) Check interrupt from Cradle Position Encoder Pulse Counter.

If interrupt is not generated before completion of 20mm cradle
travel. Table Processor indicates error on the Gantry Display.
(5) Move Cradle 20mm OUT.
(6) Check Cradle Position
[Same as step (3)] If error
(7) Check Interrupt.
[Same as step (4)] if error
(8) Move Cradle 20mm IN.

(9) Cradle will be stopped by Uncontrolled Fail Detection Circuit
TBLSTP LED lights ON.
If Uncontrolled Fail Detection Circuit does not work,
Table Processor indicates error.
39
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-1-3
2242063
I/O Port Bit Check
CAUTION
Perform the following procedure, before starting this test.
D Switch OFF the TBL/Tilt and Scan switches at the Gantry rear base.
D Set TGP service switches to OFF/SVE/SLOW/HOME position.
D Switch OFF the HV and Rotor Control circuit breaker.
D Insert the azimuth lock pin.
1.
2.
3.
Set S14 and S15 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ON

position.
(Bit 0)
In
Up
Press the Reset switch of the TGP Board, the Gantry Display shows
the Test Number (200) and cradle position value in decimal form.
(Bit 1)
Fast
Height
(Bit 2)
Out
Down
Press TEST B switch once on the TGP board.

The Gantry Display shows the following:
FWD
Test Number
4.
Bit Status of Port
Set I/O Port Bit.

Example: Set Bit0, Bit1 and Bit3 to High
(i.e., press [In], [Fast], [Height] switches)
The Gantry Display shows :
Bit7:0
Bit6:0
0
Bit5:0
Bit4:0
0
(Bit 6)
Bit3:1
Bit2:0
2
310
(Bit 3)
Move to (Bit 4)
Scan
BWD
Zero
(Bit 5)
Range
Light
(Bit 7)
Bit1:1
Bit0:1
3
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-1-3
2242063
I/O Port Bit Check (continued)
5.
To select the next test, press the TEST B switch. The Gantry Display shows:
6.
To select test (210), press the TEST B switch once again. The Gantry Display shows:
7.
Set I/O Port Bit

Example: Set Bit0, Bit1 and Bit5 to High (i.e., press [In], [Fast], [Zero] switches).
The Gantry Display shows:
Bit7:0
Bit6:0
0
8.
Bit5:1
Bit4:0
2
Bit3:0
Bit2:0
0
Bit1:1
Bit0:1
3
The Test number increase each time you press the TEST B switch until it reaches 240.
The Test number loops pack to 200 after 240.
If set data and read data are not same, error is indicated on the Gantry Display as follows:
9.
To exit this Test Mode: Move S14 and S15 to OFF position, then press RESET switch.
Table 35
Test
Number
200
210
220
240
I/O Port Bit Check Program (Table Processor)

Test
Description
WR0B
Address FFB0
I/O Port Bit Set/Clear Test
Bit Set/Clear Test

: Scan Control
WR1B
Address FFB1
Bit Set/Clear Test

WR2B
Address FFB2
Bit Set/Clear Test

: Status LED Control
: ADC and Gantry Panel LED Control
Table Processor P0 Port Bit Table Processor Output Port Bit Set/Clear Test
Set/Clear Test
If Set data and Read data are not same, error is indicated on the Gantry Display as follows:
311
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-1-4
2242063
Table Processor Bit Table
Table 36
Table Processor Bit Table
Port
Bit
7
P0
(OUT)
P1
(IN)
BWDE
FWDE
DNE
UPE
TBLDRV
IN
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
GSCAN
(IN)
OGCOM
(SIO)
TOCOM
(SIO)
SCANRST
COMINT
(INTR)
ADINTR
(INTR)
TESTB
(INTR)
TBLPLS
(PLS)
TBLERR
(IN)
UNLATCH
OUTDRV
(counter)
INDRV
(counter)
OUTPLS
(counter)
INPLS
(counter)
INTERCA
S16
P2
P3
TTRG
(PLS)
312
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2
2242063
GANTRY PROCESSOR OFFLINE TEST
3-2-1
I/O Port Status Check
1.
Set S6 of the GANTRY PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ON position.
2.
Press the Reset switch of the TGP Board.

Example Value
3.
To select the Test program, press the TEST A switch on the TGP board. The Test Number increases each time
you press the test switch until it reaches 414.
The Test Number Loops back to 400 after 414.
4.
313
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2-1
2242063

Table 37
Test
Number
400
Gantry Processor I/O Port Status Check

Test
Azimuth Position
Description
D Zero Position; 180 Position
D 1/digit
(e.g.) CCW 3sec Rest Position = 71
HOME
= 0
CW 2sec Rest Position = 431
401
Gantry Rotation Time
D Display the time from HOME position to HOME position.

D 10msec/digit
(e.g.) Time = 1.825sec
Time = 20737sec
402
Gantry Driving Time
Display = 109
Display = 180
Display = 611
Display = 0183
Display = 0274
D Display the time from Rest position to Rest position.

D 10msec/digit
(e.g.) Time = 1.825
Time = 2.737
Display = 0320
Display = 0440
The procedure of TEST401 and 402 as follows:

a. Set display mode to TEST No. 401 or 402.
b. Flip on S3 of the Dip SW.
c. Rotate the Gantry from CW(CCW) REST position to CCW(CW)
REST position by MNL and FIX SW on the TGP board.
d. TGP measures and displays the time.
(Display indicates 0000 during measuring the time.)
e. Flip off S3 of Dip SW after the TEST.
403
RD4A I/O Port
Display TGP Manual Switch Status.

Address FFB4
Refer to Table bor Bit Assignment.
404
RD5A I/O Port
Display Aperture Status and Gantry Rest Position Status in Complement

Number
Address FFB5
Refer to Table for Bit Assignment.
405
Processor Port 0
Display Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 0.

Refer to Table 39 for Bit Assignment.
406
Processor Port 1
Display Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 1 in Complement

Number
407
Processor Port 2
Display Input/Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 2.

408
Processor Port 3
Display Input/Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 3.

314
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2-1
2242063
Table 37
Test
Number
409
Gantry Processor I/O Port Status Check

Test
WR0A I/O Port
Description
Display Positioning Light and Scan Control Port Status.
Address FFB0
410
WR1A I/O Port
Display Status of Gantry Processor Status lED Control Port.

Address FFB1
411
D/A Converter Status
Display Input Data to D/A Converter in decimal (0 4095).

MSB = Bit 7 of Address
LSB = Bit 4 of Address
412
Display Error Code while ERRA LED ON.

ON condition that Gantry Processor works properly
(i.e.) LOOPA LED alternates ON, OFF
Bit Assignment is:

Bit 7 : Micro Processor hungup
Bit 6 : Gantry rotation Initializing error
Bit 5 : Gantry Rotation Over Speed
Bit 4 : Gantry not rotate
Bit 3 : Communication error TG OC
(No ACK/NAC Response from OC)
Bit 2 : Communication Error TG OC
(Table Processor has sent NAC 3 times.)
Bit 1 : Communication Error
(Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready.)
Bit 0 : Communication Error
(Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready when
ACK/NAC XMT is requested.)
413
Display ROM SUM check Data

Displayed when ROM SUM Check is completes successfully.
414
Rotate Peek Speed
Counts the encoder pulses every 10.9msec during scan and displays their
maximum value.
Example: When the Gantry rotates at the speed of 3.079sec/Rotation,
the Gantry Display shows the following value ideally.
10.9(msec)
3.097 1,000(msec/rot)
Practically, about 4 counts greater than this value will be displayed due to
the overshoot of rotation.
14,256(pulse/rot)
Note ACK : Acknowledge

NAC : Nonacknowledge
XMT : Transmission
315
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2-1
2242063

Table 38
Index
RD5A
Aperture
Status and
Gantry
Azimuth
Status
(FFB5)
RD4A
TGP Manual
Switch Status
(FFB4)
WR3A
DAC Data
(Lower Bit)
(FFB3)
WR2A
DAC Data
(Higher Bit)
(FFB2)
Bit Assignment of I/O Port (Gantry Processor)

Device Data Bit
U6E
D7 : APT10
D6 : APT5
D5 : APT2
D4 : APT1
D3 : CWR
D2 : CCWR
D1 : SVALM
D0 : GLIMT
U7C
D7 : SYS
D6 : MNL
D5 : CW
D4 : CCW
D3 : ARG
D2 : FIX
D1 : FAST
D0 : SLOW
U8R
D7 : Bit 9
D6 : Bit 10
D5 : Bit 11
D4 : Bit 12
D3 :
D2 :
D1 :
D0 :
U8T
D7 : Bit 1
D6 : Bit 2
D5 : Bit 3
D4 : Bit 4
D3 : Bit 5
D2 : Bit 6
D1 : Bit 7
D0 : Bit 8
Description
(D7 = 0)
(D6 = 0)
(D5 = 0)
(D4 = 0)
(D3 = 0)
(D2 = 0)
Aperture is set 10mm position.

Gantry at CW Rest position.
Gantry at CCW Rest position.
Servo Alarm is detected.
(D0 = 1) Gantry reached to CW or CCW Limit
(or) Cable Check Switch is actuated.
D7 = 1 ;
D6 = 1 ;
D5 = 1 ;
D4 = 1 ;
D3 = 1 ;
D2 = 1 ;
D1 = 1 ;
D0 = 1 ;
SYS/OFF/MNL switch is placed to SYS position

SYS/OFF/MNL switch is placed to MNL position
CW/HOME/CCW switch is placed to CW position
CW;home/CCW switch is placed to CCW position
ARB/SVE/FIX switch is placed to ARB position
ARB/SVE FIX switch is placed to FIX position
FAST/MID/SLOW switch is placed to FAST position
FAST/MID/SLOW switch is placed to SLOW position
Input Data to Digital to Analog Convertor (IC6)
Not Used
Input Data to Digital to Analog Convertor (IC6)
316
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2-1
2242063

Table 38
Index
WR1A
Processor
(A) Status
LED Control
(FFB1)
WR0A
Positioning
Light and
Scan Control
(by Gantry
Processor)
(FFB0)
Bit Assignment of I/O Port (Gantry Processor) (continued)

Device Data Bit
U6C
D7 : ERR.A
D6 : LOOP.A
D5 : OCREQ.A
D4 : MNL.A
D3 :
D2 :
D1 :
D0 :
U7E
D7 : PLight On
D6 : GSCAN
D5 : T.DENA
D4 : GPHVON
D3 : SVON
D2 : HOMERST
D1 :
D0 : G.OFFSET
Description
Control LED ON/OFF
Not Used
Positioning Light Control ; D7=1 ; Positioning Light ON

Scan Mode Control ; D6=1 ; Gantry Scan
DAS Control ; D5=1 ; Table Processor DAS ENABLE
HV ON Control ; D4=1 ; HV ON by Gantry Pulse
Axial drive Control ; Servo ON D3=1 ; Release Hold Brake
Axial drive Control ; Azimuth Position Rest D2=1 ; Move Gantry to Home
Not Used
DAS Control ; Offset Data Collection Mode
D0=1 ; Offset Data Collection by Gantry Processor
317
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2-1
2242063

Table 39
Bit Assignment of Processor Port (Gantry Processor)
Port
P0 (OUT)
Port 0
Bit
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
: INTREQ B
: APTPLS
: APRST
: BRK
: SVE
: CW/CCW
Bit 1 : SPD2
Bit 0 : SPD1
P1 (IN)
Port 1
P2
Port 2
P3
Port 3
Note
Description
Interrupt Request to Table Processor
(PLS OUT) aperture Pulse ; Pulse for Aperture Drive
Aperture Reset
; Bit5 = 0 Aperture Reset
Brake
; Bit4 = 0 Dynamic Brake Mode
Servo Enable
; Bit3 = 0 Servo Enable
CW SCAN / CCW SCAN
; DAS Control ; Bit2 = 1 CW Scan
; Bit1 = 0 CCW Scan
Scan Speed Code
; DAS Control ; Indicate Scan Speed to DAS
Bit7 : Test SW Data Test Switch S1 S8 Status
Bit0 Bit 7 ; 0 = Switch ON

Bit0 :
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
:
: TSCAN
: OGCOM
: GOCOM
:
: COMINT
: HOME
Not Used
(IN)
(SIO)
(SIO)
Not Used
(INTR IN)
(INTR IN)
Bit6 = 1 ; Table Scan Mode

Serial Communication OC Gantry Processor
Serial Communication Gantry Processor OC
Bit2 = 1 ; Communication Interrupt from Table Processor
Bit1 = 1 ; Interrupt from Gantry Pulse Photo Switch
Gantry at Home position
Bit0 = 1 ; Test Switch Interrupt
Bit 0 : TESTA
(INTR IN)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
(PLS OUT) Gantry Processor DAS Trigger

Not Used
Not Used
(IN)
Bit4 = 1 ;Positioning Light ON
Not Used
(COUNTER) DAS Trigger Pulse
(COUNTER) Azimuth Encoder Pulse (CCW Rotation)
(COUNTER) Azimuth Encoder Pulse (CW Rotation)
: GTRG
:
:
: POSL
:
: DTRG
: CCWPLS
: CWPLS
INTR
SIO
PLS
COUNTER
: Interrupt
: Serial InputOutput
: Pulse
: Input to Counter
318
TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0
3-2-2
2242063
Sequential Function Test
In this test, processor sequences through the following tests:

D Gantry Processor I/O Port Read/Write Response Test
D Gantry Processor Internal Counter Function Test
D Gantry Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function Test
D Collimater Drive Operation Test
When the Gantry Processor detects an error, it displays an error code on the Gantry display and stop the test program.
1.
Set S7 of the GANTRY PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ON position.
2.

3.
Press TEST A switch on the TGP board to start test.

Table shows the error code for each test.

4.
319
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2-2
2242063
Table 310
Gantry Processor Sequential Function Test
Test
Number
Test
500
|
547
I/O Port
Response Check
Description
D Read/Write Response Check for the I/O Port of Gantry Processor (U7L)
D Indicate Test Number and Bit Number on Gantry display if error detected.
(i.e.)
D Test Number
D Show Bit 4
500
|
507
WR0A
510
WR1A
517
I/O Port
Response Check
I/O Port
Response Check
Read Data of Processor in

decimal Number
Address FFB0
: Positioning Light and Scan Control Port
Read/Write Response Check, U7E and U7D on the TGP board.
Address FFB1
Read/Write Response Check, U6C and U6D on the TGP board.
520
|
527
WR2A
530
|
537
WR3A
540
|
547
P0
I/O Port
Response Check
Gantry Processor I/O Port, P0 Read/Write Response Check.
560
Time Base
Counter Check
D Checks Gantry Processor Internal Time Base Counter Function.
I/O Port
Response Check
I/O Port
Response Check
Address FFB2
: DAC Input Data port
Read/Write Response Check, U8T and U8S on the TGP board.
Address FFB3
: DAC Input Data Port
Read/Write Response Check, U8R and U8Q on the TGP board.
D Interval Timer repeat period 10.9 msec.

D Error Indication:
561
DAS Trigger
Pulse Generator
and
DAS Trigger
Counter Function
Check
D Checks Gantry Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function.

D Checks Gantry Processor Internal Counter Function.
D Pulse Generator generates DAS trigger pulse.
Internal Counter counts DAS trigger.
D If Counter does not count up 64 pulses within 1sec, Gantry Processor indicates
Error.
D Time Base Counter is used as a WATCHDOG TIMER.
D Error Indication:
320
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2-2
2242063

Table 310
Gantry Processor Sequential Function Test (continued)
Test
Number
Test
570
|
589
Collimator
Response Check
Description
D Check Collimator Drive Function and Position Sending.
D Move Aperture as the following sequence and check response.
If aperture does not respond to command properly,
Gantry Processor indicates Error and Stop Test.
Aperture Movement Sequence
9
11
7
1
13
2
1 mm
3 mm
6
3
5 mm
5
8
10 mm
4
12
10
Test No.
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
Test
1mm
3mm
5mm
10mm
5mm
3mm
1mm
5mm
1mm
10mm
1mm
10mm
3mm
10mm
2mm
1mm
2mm
5mm
2mm
1mm
3mm
5mm
10mm
5mm
3mm
1mm
5mm
1mm
10mm
1mm
10mm
3mm
10mm
2mm
1mm
2mm
5mm
2mm
10mm
19
16
17
1 mm
3 mm
15
5 mm
10 mm
18
14
1
2
3
4
5
: Test No. 571

: Test No. 572
: Test No. 573
: Test No. 574
: Test No. 575
6
7
8
9
10
: Test No. 576

: Test No. 577
: Test No. 578
: Test No. 579
: Test No. 580
11
12
13
14
15
: Test No. 581

: Test No. 582
: Test No. 583
: Test No. 584
: Test No. 585
16
17
18
19
: Test No. 586

: Test No. 587
: Test No. 588
: Test No. 589
(Example of Error)
Example of Movement
5mm 10mm
321
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2-3
2242063
I/O Port Bit Check
CAUTION
Perform the following procedure, before starting this test.
D Switch OFF the TBL/Tilt and Scan switches at the Gantry rear base.
D Set TGP service switches to OFF/SVE/SLOW/HOME position.
D Switch OFF the HV and Rotor Control circuit breaker.
D Insert the azimuth lock pin.
1.
Set S6 and S7 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ON position.
2.

means the output port bits are all OFF.

3.
Press TEST A switch on the TGP board to start test.

Test Number
4.
Bit Status of Port
Set the I/O Port:

Example : Set Bit0 and Bit3 to High.
(i.e., Set CCW/HOME/CW switch to CW position, Set FAST/MID/SLOW switch to FAST position)
Bit7:0
Bit6:0
0
Bit5:0
Bit4:0
0
Bit3:1
Bit2:0
2
322
Bit1:0
Bit0:1
1
Bit7
SYS
Bit5
ABT
Bit3
FAST
Bit1
CCW
MNL
Bit6
FIX
Bit4
SLOW
Bit2
CW
Bit0
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2-3
2242063
I/O Port Bit Check (continued)
5.
To select the next test, press the TEST A switch.

6.
To select test 610, press the TEST A switch once again.

7.
The test number increases each time you press the TEST B switch until it reaches 650.
The test number loops back to 600 after 650.
If set data and read data are not same, error is indicated on the Gantry Display as follows:
8.
To exit this Test Mode: Move S6 and S7 to OFF position, then press RESET switch.
Table 311
Test
Number
600
I/O Port Bit Check Program (Gantry Processor)

Test
WR0A
Description
Address
FFB0
: Positioning Light and Scan Control Port
Bit Set/Clear Test
610
WR1A
Address
FFB1
Bit Set/Clear Test
620
WR2A
Address
FFB2
:DAC Input Data port
Bit Set/Clear Test
630
WR3A
Address
FFB3
: DAC Input Data Port
Bit Set/Clear Test
640
650
Gantry Processor P0 Port

Bit Set/Clear Test
Gantry Processor Output Port P0, Bit Set/Clear Test
Collimator Set Test
Set Aperture
Bit0 select
Bit1 select
Bit2 select
Bit3 select
Bit4 select
(Bit5 Bit7
323
Response Error (Example)

1mm set
2mm set
3mm set
5mm set
10mm set
Not used)
Shows that the position sensor

of 1mm and 3mm are ON.
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
3-2-4
2242063
Gantry Processor Bit Table
Table 312
Gantry Processor Bit Table
Port
Bit
7
P0
(out)
INTERC B
APTPLS
APTRST
BRK
SVE
CW/CCW
SPD2
SPD1
P1
(in)
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
TSCAN
(IN)
OGCOM
(SIO)
OGCOM
(SIO)
COMINT
(INTR)
HOME
(INTR)
TEST A
(INTR)
POSL
(IN)
DTRIG
(counter)
CCWPLS
(counter)
CWPLS
(counter)
P2
P3
GTRG
(PLS)
324
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
2242063
SECTION 4 SERVO AMP. AND SERVO MOTOR
4-1
4-1-1
SERVO ALARM AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Flow Chart
Illustration 41
Troubleshooting Flow Chart (For Servo Amp. 2108990)

Motor wont Rotate
Any Alarm on LED of

Servo Amp.
Yes
Refer to Servo Alarm of this

section.
No
Check TGP Board.
No
Check TGP Board.
No
Check Signal Cable from TGP
to Servo Amp.
Is Voltage Command at
VoutAGND of TGP
Yes
SVE Signal OK ?
(i.e., +24VU8Y5pin of TGP)
Yes
Replace Servo Amp.
41
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
4-1-1
2242063
Flow Chart (continued)

Illustration 42
Troubleshooting Flow Chart (For Servo Amp. P9153SF)
Motor wont Rotate
Any Alarm on LED of

Servo Amp.
Yes
Refer to Servo Alarm of this

section.
No
Is Voltage Command
at CN1 34 ?
No
D Check TGP Board.

D Check Signal Cable from TGP to Servo Amp.
Yes
RSGO Signal OK ?
(i.e., CN1 2125 Closed)
No
D Check TGP Board.

D Check Signal Cable from TGP to Servo Amp.
Yes
Check Fuses OK ?
No
Replace Fuse(s).
Yes
Replace Servo Amp.
42
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
4-1-2
2242063
Servo Alarm
The following descriptions comprise the troubleshooting guide for the Servo Alarm indicated on the Servo Alarm LED
of Servo Amp.
For Servo Amp. 2108990

LED
Case
OFF
Cause
Action
AC Power is not supplied to the driver.
Check if wire harnesses are open.
SVON signal is not supplied.
Check if wire harnesses are open.
Turn ON then or remove the JSW21

FLMT and RLMT signals are not ON jumper.
At powerON
Faulty driver control circuit
At SVON
Short circuit between motor wire har- Replace Motor.

nesses
Faulty driver power amp.
Replace Servo Amp.
Replace Servo Amp.
When the motor starts to rotate or de- Driver misadjustment

celerate
2
At SVON (Motor shaft is vibrated)
Servo Amp. misadjustment
When the motor starts to rotate or de- Overload for rotation section
celerate
Locked motor shaft
Replace Servo Amp.

Check if a material is contacted with
Gantry rotating section.
Check motor (Is mechanical brake
applied ?)
At SVON (Motor shaft is not vi- Misconnection of encoder signal cir- Replace Servo Amp.
brated.)
cuit
3
When the motor starts to rotate or de- Overshot of step response

celerate
Replace Servo Amp.
When power is applied
Misconnection inside the driver
Replace Servo Amp.
After performing control operation
Overheat inside the driver
Check scan room temperature, then

replace Servo Amp.
When power is applied
Open circuit of encoder signal wire
Check CN2 connector.
When Gantry rotates slightly after Misconnection

(U,V,W)
power ON and SVON
of CN2 and TB2 Check CN2 connector and TB2

(U,V,W) terminals.
Abnormal encoder signal

7
8
=
After SVON signal is input
Replace Motor.
Alarm signal of regenerative board is not After Scan and Table/Tilt switches
connected, or power is not applied to re- are turned On, Control switch is ON.
Then check if wires (R,S,T) are congenerative board.
nected properly to TB2.
Fuse(s) is burn.
Replace fuse(s) of the Servo Amp.

front panel, or replace Servo Amp.
When motor starts to decelerate
Abnormal regenerative board
Replace Servo Amp.
After SVON signal is input
The fuse of the driver board is burn.
Replace Servo Amp.
Abnormal driver control circuit
Replace Servo Amp.
43
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
4-1-2
2242063
Servo Alarm (continued)
For Servo Amp. P9153SF

1 O.C. (OVER CURRENT)
a. Motor winding short circuit ?
Replace Motor.
b. Motor lead wire grounded ?
Check power lead of motor.
c. Shorted output Transistor ?
Replace servo Amp.
d. Control circuit of Servo Amp. ?
Replace Servo Amp.
2 O.L. (OVER LOAD)

a. Gantry mechanical Failure ?
Check Gantry.
b. Control circuit of Servo Amp. ?
Replace Servo Amp.
c. Communication Sensor of motor ? Replace Motor.

3 O.H. (OVER HEAT)
a. Servo Amp. ?
Replace Servo Amp.
4 F.E. (CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF)

a. Motor winding short circuit ?
Replace Motor.
b. Motor lead wire grounded ?
Check power lead of motor.
c. Shorted output Transistor ?
Re;ace Servo Amp.
d. Control circuit of Servo Amp. ?
Replace Servo Amp.
5 P.E. (DYNAMIC BRAKE FUNCTION FAIL)

a. Dynamic Brake Resistors open ?
Check Dynamic Brake Resistors.
b. Input Voltage too high ?
Check Input Voltage.
6 S.E. (SPEED ERROR)

a. VR2 ADJUSTMENT ?
Check and Adjust VR2.

Check Voltage Command from TGP.
b. VOLTAGE COMMAND ?
c. TACO GEN Signal Connection ?
Check TACO GEN Signal Cable.
d. TACO GEN Fail ?
Replace Motor.
7 V.E. (VOLTAGE ERROR POWER FAIL)

a. Input Voltage drop (170 VAC)?
Check Input Voltage.
b. Bad Connection of Input Lead ?
Check Cable Connection.
c. Control Circuit of Servo Amp. ?
Replace Servo Amp.
8 C.E. (COMMUNICATION ERROR)

a. Control Circuit of Servo Amp. ?
Replace Servo Amp.
b. Signal Connection between Servo Amp. and Motor ?
Check Cable Connection.
c. Communication Sensor of Motor ? Replace Motor.
44
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
4-1-3
2242063
Resetting the Servo Alarm
To reset the Servo Alarm displayed on the Servo Amp. LED, press the reset button as show in illustration below.
Illustration 43
Location of Reset Button
Servo Amp.
TGP Board
Reset Button
(P9153SF Servo Amp. Only)
SUB Board
Reset Button
(2108947 SUB Board Only)
45
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
4-2
2242063
SIGNAL CHECK POINT OF SERVO AMP. (P9153SF)

Table 42
Test Point of Servo Amp.
Test Point
Function
Description
15G
Ground
15VDC Power Ground
+15
+15VDC
Control Power +15V 0.3VDC
15
15VDC
Control Power 15V 0.3VDC
+24
+24VDC
Control Power +24V 20%
+12
+12VDC
+12VDC : +12V 20%
12G
Ground
+12VDC Power Ground
TP8
Voltage Command
Voltage Command Signal 6V/1,000rpm
VTG
TACH. VOLTAGE
Output of TACHO. GEN Feedback Loop Amp.

4.5V 0.5V / 1,000rpm
Gantry CCW Rotation
Gantry CW Rotation
IA
Current Monitor
: Positive
: Negative
Output of Current Monitor Amp.

0.2V/A 5.0%
A
B
Communication Sensor Output Communication Sensor Output : Phase A

Signal Monitor
Communication Sensor Output : Phase B
Communication Sensor Output : Phase C
CK
Clock Pulse
Clock Pulse (Basic Clock)

0.9mHz 0.2mHz
TP1
TP2
Pulse Width Modulation Signal Pulse Width Modulation Signal for Inverter
1kHz 2kHz
46
TABLE/GANTRY

REV 0
2242063
DAS / DETECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 1 DETECTOR CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1
1-2
11
DETECTOR CHANNEL ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DETECTOR CHANNEL RING DIAMETER CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
SECTION 2 IMAGE PROBLEMS (DETECTOR RELATED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
2-1
ARTIFACT PROBLEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
DAS/DETECTOR

blank
2242063
ii
DAS/DETECTOR

REV 0
2242063
SECTION 1 DETECTOR CHANNEL
1-1
DETECTOR CHANNEL ARRAY
The active and reference channels are connected the DAS. The ground channels are both ground and connected
to the DAS. The 32 reference channels are divided into two groups of 6 channels each. The channels of each group
are connected in parallel, so they produce 2 reference signals, one from each group of 16 reference channels. The
reference signals are used to apply corrections to the acquired xray view data.
4
16
635
GND Ref. Channels
Active Channels
635
16
Ref. Channels GND
321
636
(16ch. COMMON)
637
(16ch. COMMON)
11
DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0
1-2
2242063
DETECTOR CHANNEL RING DIAMETER CHART
Table shows the DAS Channel Ring Diameter cross references. Refer to the description below.
CH# :
CN# :
AR# :
PN# :
FR# :
BR# :
DA# :
Channel Number
Connector Number
Pin Array (A D)
Pin Number from left side (1 25)
Flexible printed circuit Number
Branch Number of each FPC
Amplifier Number of CAM and NCAM boards
#1
:Unit Number #1 of CAM Board #1
#10
:Unit Number #2 of CAM Board #2
DIA (cm)
Diameter of image ring artifact in cm
PN#
1 2 3 4
AR#
23 24 25
A
B
C
D
12
DAS/DETECTOR

REV 0
1-2
2242063
DETECTOR CHANNEL RING DIAMETER CHART (continued)

Table 11
CH#
CN#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ring Diameter Chart
AR# PN#
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
CH#
CN#
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
42.72
42.59
42.46
42.34
42.21
42.03
41.96
41.83
41.70
41.57
41.46
41.32
41.19
41.06
40.93
40.81
40.63
40.55
40.42
40.29
40.17
40.04
39.91
39.78
39.65
39.52
39.39
39.27
39.14
39.01
38.83
38.75
38.62
38.49
38.35
38.23
38.10
37.97
37.84
37.72
37.59
37.46
37.33
37.20
37.07
36.94
36.81
36.63
36.55
36.42
36.29
36.16
36.02
35.89
35.76
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
13
AR# PN#
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
35.63
35.50
35.37
35.24
35.11
34.98
34.85
34.72
34.59
34.45
34.32
34.19
34.06
33.93
33.80
33.67
33.53
33.40
33.27
33.14
33.01
32.88
32.74
32.61
32.48
32.35
32.22
32.08
31.95
31.82
31.69
31.55
31.42
31.29
31.16
31.02
30.89
30.76
30.63
30.49
30.36
30.23
30.09
29.96
29.83
29.69
29.56
29.43
29.29
29.16
29.03
28.89
28.76
28.63
28.49
DAS/DETECTOR

REV 0
1-2
2242063

Table 11
CH#
CN#
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Ring Diameter Chart (continued)
AR# PN#
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
CH#
CN#
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
19
19
20
20
20
20
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
28.36
28.23
28.09
27.96
27.82
27.69
27.56
27.42
27.29
27.15
27.02
26.89
26.75
26.62
26.48
26.35
26.21
26.08
25.94
25.81
25.68
25.54
25.41
25.27
25.14
25.00
24.87
24.73
24.60
24.46
24.33
24.19
24.06
23.92
23.79
23.65
23.51
23.38
23.24
23.11
22.97
22.84
22.70
22.57
22.43
22.29
22.16
22.02
21.89
21.75
21.62
21.48
21.34
21.21
21.07
166
167
168
169
170
170
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
180
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
14
AR# PN#
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
20.94
20.80
20.66
20.53
20.39
20.25
20.12
19.98
19.85
19.71
19.57
19.44
19.30
19.16
19.03
18.89
18.75
18.62
18.48
18.34
18.21
18.07
17.93
17.80
17.66
17.52
17.39
17.25
17.11
16.97
16.84
16.70
16.56
16.43
16.29
16.15
16.01
15.83
15.74
15.60
15.46
15.33
15.19
15.05
14.92
14.73
14.64
14.50
14.36
14.23
14.09
13.95
13.81
13.68
13.54
DAS/DETECTOR

REV 0
1-2
2242063

Table 11
CH#
CN#
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
AR# PN#
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
CH#
CN#
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13.40
13.26
13.13
12.99
12.85
12.71
12.57
12.44
12.30
12.16
12.02
11.88
11.75
11.61
11.47
11.33
11.19
11.06
10.92
10.78
10.64
10.50
10.37
10.23
10.09
9.95
9.81
9.67
9.54
9.40
9.26
9.12
8.98
8.84
8.71
8.57
8.43
8.29
8.15
8.01
7.87
7.74
7.60
7.46
7.32
7.18
7.04
6.90
6.77
6.63
6.49
6.35
6.21
6.07
5.93
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
15
AR# PN#
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
20
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
5.80
5.66
5.52
5.38
5.24
5.10
4.96
4.82
4.69
4.55
4.41
4.27
4.13
3.99
3.85
3.71
3.58
3.44
3.30
3.16
3.02
2.88
2.74
2.60
2.47
2.33
2.19
2.05
1.91
1.77
1.63
1.49
1.35
1.22
1.08
0.94
0.80
0.66
0.52
0.38
0.24
0.10
0.03
0.17
0.31
0.45
0.59
0.73
0.87
1.01
1.15
1.28
1.42
1.56
1.70
DAS/DETECTOR

REV 0
1-2
2242063

Table 11
CH#
CN#
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
AR# PN#
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
CH#
CN#
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
1.84
1.98
2.12
2.26
2.40
2.53
2.67
2.81
2.95
3.09
3.23
3.37
3.51
3.65
3.78
3.92
4.06
4.20
4.34
4.48
4.62
4.76
4.89
5.03
5.17
5.31
5.45
5.59
5.73
5.87
6.00
6.14
6.23
6.42
6.56
6.70
6.84
6.97
7.11
7.25
7.39
7.53
7.67
7.81
7.94
8.08
8.22
8.36
8.50
8.64
8.77
8.91
9.05
9.19
9.33
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
16
AR# PN#
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
2
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
1
1
1
1
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
9.47
9.60
9.74
9.88
10.02
10.16
10.30
10.43
10.57
10.71
10.85
10.99
11.13
11.26
11.40
11.54
11.68
11.82
11.95
12.09
12.23
12.37
12.51
12.64
12.78
12.92
13.06
13.19
13.33
13.47
13.61
13.75
13.88
14.02
14.16
14.30
14.43
14.57
14.71
14.85
14.98
15.12
15.26
15.40
15.53
15.67
15.81
15.95
16.08
16.22
16.36
16.49
16.63
16.77
16.91
DAS/DETECTOR

REV 0
1-2
2242063

Table 11
CH#
CN#
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
AR# PN#
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
CH#
CN#
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
17.04
17.18
17.32
17.45
17.59
17.73
17.86
18.00
18.14
18.27
18.41
18.55
18.69
18.82
18.96
19.10
19.23
19.37
19.50
19.64
19.78
19.91
20.05
20.19
20.32
20.46
20.60
20.73
20.87
21.00
21.14
21.28
21.41
21.55
21.68
21.82
21.96
22.09
22.23
22.36
22.50
22.63
22.77
22.91
23.04
23.18
23.31
23.45
23.58
23.72
23.85
23.99
24.12
24.26
24.39
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
17
AR# PN#
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
26
24.53
24.66
24.80
24.93
25.07
25.20
25.34
25.47
25.61
25.74
25.83
26.01
26.15
26.23
26.42
26.55
26.63
26.82
26.95
27.09
27.22
27.36
27.49
27.62
27.76
27.89
28.02
28.16
28.29
28.43
28.56
28.69
28.83
28.96
29.09
29.23
29.36
29.49
29.63
29.76
29.89
30.03
30.16
30.29
30.43
30.56
30.69
30.82
30.96
31.09
31.28
31.36
31.49
31.62
31.75
DAS/DETECTOR

REV 0
1-2
2242063

Table 11
CH#
CN#
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
AR# PN#
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
CH#
CN#
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
31.89
32.02
32.15
32.28
32.41
32.55
32.68
32.81
32.94
33.07
33.21
33.34
33.47
33.60
33.73
33.86
34.00
34.13
34.26
34.39
34.52
34.65
34.78
34.91
35.04
35.18
35.31
35.44
35.57
35.70
35.83
35.96
36.09
36.22
36.35
36.48
36.61
36.74
36.87
37.00
37.13
37.26
37.39
37.52
37.65
37.78
37.91
38.04
38.17
38.30
38.43
38.56
38.69
38.81
38.94
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
18
AR# PN#
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
C
A
D
B
D
C
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
8
9
FR#
BR#
DA#
DIA (cm)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
1
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
0
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
30
31
39.07
39.20
39.33
39.46
39.59
39.72
39.84
39.97
40.10
40.23
40.36
40.49
40.61
40.74
40.87
41.00
41.13
41.25
41.38
41.51
41.64
41.76
41.89
42.02
42.15
42.27
42.40
42.53
42.65
42.78
0.00
DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 2 IMAGE PROBLEMS (DETECTOR RELATED)

2-1
ARTIFACT PROBLEM
The following illustrations are examples which may be caused by DAS component failure.
Single Channel Ring
Phantom
The failure of one input capacitor or one Detector channel causes a single
failure . Illustration shows an example of single channel ring. To identify a
DAS channel, measure the ring diameter and use the ring diameter chart
(Section 1-2).
Single Channel Streak
Phantom
If a single channel failure occurs during one view period, it appears as

single line on image (streak). To identify the DAS channel which caused this
streak, use the circle cursor to measure the distance from image center to
the streak, then use the ring diameter chart (Section 1-2) to determine the
DAS channel. This failure can also be caused by a single channel signal
view data drop during data conversion or data transfer.
22 Channel Wide Band
Phantom
A unit conditioning circuit failure causes 22 channels to fail. Illustration

shows an example of a 22 Channel Wide Band Ring.
21
DAS/DETECTOR

blank
2242063
22
DAS/DETECTOR

REV 0
2242063
XRAY GENERATOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 1 FAILURE ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1
LED INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
Power Cont Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2
INV Cont Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-3
FIL Cont Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
11
14
15
XRAY GENERATOR

blank
2242063
ii
XRAY GENERATOR
REV 0
2242063
SECTION 1 FAILURE ANALYSIS
1-1
1-1-1
LED INDICATORS
Power Cont Board
The Power Cont board contains 42 LEDs that provide XG system status and information. During XG system troubleshooting, some LEDs provide valuable information that speeds up the troubleshooting process.
The LEDs D1 D5 illuminates only during OFFLINE exposure mode, that is, when the cable is connected between
CN15 and CN1. These LEDs display the XG system status during OFFLINE exposure.
Illustration 11
LED Locations
D1 D5
POWER CONT Board
D14 D21
D22 D34
D35 D50
11
XRAY GENERATOR
REV 0
1-1-1
2242063
Power Cont Board (continued)
XG FAIL
D1
When OFF, it indicates that some failure(s) occurred in the XG system.

The failures it detects are:
D Over kv, Under kv, Over mA
D Filament Overcurrent (detected on FIL CONT board)
D Power Failure (+VCC, VCC; detected on FIL CONT board)
D XRay Tube Overheat (detected by thermal SW INV CONT board)
D Rotor Overcurrent (detected on INV CONT board)
D Loose connection of CN5, CN8 or CN17
D Exposure backup timer, etc. (detected by CPU board)
POWER
D2
The DC Power Supply for (+5V) POWER CONT board is normal.
XG ACT
D3
(XG Active) The rotor is in operation.
XRY ON
D4
(XRay ON) XRay is being emitted.
XG RDY
D5
(XG Ready)
The rotor is running at the specified speed and HV ON command will be accepted.
HV ON
D14
(High Voltage On) The high voltage output command is received from OC.
XG RDY
D15
(XG Ready)
The rotor is running at the specified speed and the HV ON command will be accepted.
XG ON
D16
(XRay Generator ON)
KV1
D17
KV selection code.
KV0
D18
KV selection code.
MA2
D19
mA selection code.
MA1
D20
mA selection code.
MA0
D21
mA selection code.
XG FAIL
D22
This LED lights when the following failures are detected:

D Over kv, Under kv, Over mA
D Filament Overcurrent (detected on FIL CONT board)
D Power Failure (+VCC, VCC; detected on FIL CONT board)
D XRay Tube Overheat (detected by thermal SW INV CONT board)
D Rotor Overcurrent (detected on INV CONT board)
D Loose connection of CN5, CN8 or CN17
D Exposure backup timer, etc. (detected by CPU board)
OVP4
D23
(Positive Side) Over KV is detected, or CN6 is loosely connected.
OVN4
D24
(Negative Side) Over KV is detected, or CN9 is loosely connected.
OVP1
D25
(Positive Side)
Over KV (on the first stage of CW assemblies) is detected, or CN6 is loosely connected.
OVN1
D26
(Negative Side)
Over KV (on the first stage of CW assemblies) is detected, or CN9 is loosely connected.
DVP4
D27
(Positive Side) Under KV is detected.
DVN4
D28
(Negative Side) Under KV is detected.
OLP
D29
(Positive Side) Over mA is detected.
OLN
D30
(Negative Side) Over mA is detected.
The rotor start command is received from OC.
12
XRAY GENERATOR
REV 0
1-1-1
2242063
Power Cont Board (continued)
OVH
D31
(Over Heat) The overheat on the XRay Tube housing is detected.
ROT OC
D32
(Rotor Overcurrent)
FIL OC
D33
(Filament Overcurrent)
POWER FAIL
D34
The main D.C. power supply (+VCC, VCC) failed (detected on FIL CONT board).
ST3
D35
(Status 3)
Information code. (see Table 11)
ST2
D36
(Status 2)
ST1
D37
(Status 1)
ST0
D38
(Status 0)
PWR11
D39
(Power 11) Power reference code for the heating transformer.
PWR10
D40
(Power 10) Power reference code for the heating transformer.
PWR9
D41
(Power 9)
Power reference code for the heating transformer.
PWR8
D42
(Power 8)
PWR7
D43
(Power 7)
PWR6
D44
(Power 6)
PWR5
D45
(Power 5)
PWR4
D46
(Power 4)
PWR3
D47
(Power 3)
PWR2
D48
(Power 2)
PWR1
D49
(Power 1)
PWR0
D50
(Power 0)
Table 11
The overcurrent for the rotor is detected.

The Overcurrent for the heating transformer is detected.
ST0 ST3 Information

Error Messages
LED Status
35 36 37 38
HV ON overtime (14.67sec / less than 100mA)
f f f F
HV ON overtime (5.54sec / more than 100mA)
f f F f
FIL3 switch does not match SOFT switch
f f F F
80kV or 140kV can not be selected
f F f f
RAM over error
f F f F
RAM set error
f F F f
RAM clear error
f F F F
3 no answer (serial communication)
F f f f
3 NACK (serial communication)
F f f F
Hard error (serial communication)
F f F f
13
XRAY GENERATOR

REV 0
1-1-2
2242063
INV Cont Board
Illustration 12
LED Locations
INV CONT Board
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
LED 9
The following LED descriptions apply when that LED lights (LED ON).
START
LED1
The rotor start command is given from Power Cont board or or by the S11 switch (START)
HSPD
LED2
(High Speed) The Power Cont board or the jumper J1 (HSPD) select high speed
mode. J1 is installed for HSPD mode.
ACC
LED3
(Acceleration)
RUN
LED4
The rotor is running.
BRK
LED5
(Brake)
RUN RYL
LED6
(Run Relay) Relay K8 is energized (supplies rotor power to the stator).
BRK RYL
LED7
(Brake Relay)
Relay K7 is energized (supplies deceleration power to the stator).
OC
LED8
(Overcurrent)
Overcurrent is detected in the rotor inverter output.
EXP INTL
LED9
(Exposure Interlock)
The rotor is in acceleration.
The rotor is in deceleration.
The rotor is running at the specified speed.
14
XRAY GENERATOR

REV 0
1-1-3
2242063
FIL Cont Board
Illustration 13
LED Location
FIL CONT Board
D1
VCC
D1
When OFF, it indicates the power failure (+VCC, VCC).
15
XRAY GENERATOR

blank
2242063
16
XRAY GENERATOR
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371

P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems Europe: Telex 698626
283, rue de la Minire, B.P. 34, 78533 Buc Cedex, France

Sytec I Advan. Diag PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Sytec I Advan. Diag PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Technical

Copyrighte 1999 by General Electric Company

Advanced Service Documentation

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

D IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.

D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE

D DIESES KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.

D SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

  

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE

0 . . . . . . Apr. 6, 1999 . . . Initial release.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

SECTION 2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM SUPPORT DISPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION 4 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM CLASS C SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 6 MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7 IMAGE SPATIAL RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

10. SUPPORT DISPLAY

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

MAINTENANCE PROGRAM (continued)

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

SECTION 2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

The SUPPORT contains the following menus:

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

OFF LINE SCAN

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

How to Use Support Programs (continued)

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

OFF LINE SCAN

2.7 sec (3.6sec in CT Sytec 2000i, S)

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

OFF LINE SCAN (continued)

Axial Scan (continued)

To modify the parameter, select 2 (EDIT).

<1:1.8sec, 2:2.7sec, 3:4.5sec>

Select 1 (SCAN) to perform the scan.

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

OFF LINE SCAN (continued)

To modify the parameter, select 2 (EDIT).

<0, 5, 10, .....350, 355 [deg]

* RAW DATA FORMAT *

* KIND OF DATA *

* KIND OF DATA *

* ALIGNMENT *